JP2020092969A - Pinball game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of further enhancing playability.SOLUTION: When the cumulative number of times a first big winning symbol is stop-displayed reaches a predetermined number while probability variation continues after shifting from a normal probability state to a probability variation state until a shift is made to the next normal probability state, a game state is shifted to the normal probability state after the end of a special game. Meanwhile, when the cumulative number of times the first big winning symbol is stop-displayed while the probability variation continues is less than a predetermined number, the game state can be shifted to the probability variation state after the end of the special game. An expected degree suggestive performance executed in a specific situation in which the cumulative number of times the first big winning symbol is stop-displayed while the probability variation continues is the number obtained by subtracting 1 from the predetermined number is likely to be a lower expected degree than the expected degree suggestive performance executed in a non-specific situation in which the cumulative number of times the first big winning symbol is stop-displayed while the probability variation continues is less than the number obtained by subtracting 1 from the predetermined number, or the expected degree suggestive performance is less likely to be executed in a specific situation while the probability variation continues than in a non-specific situation while the probability variation continues.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a ball game machine having a game area where a game ball is shot.

Conventionally, among various types of ball game machines, a game machine called a so-called first-class pachinko game machine, while varying a plurality of symbols in a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided in the approximate center of the game board. Display (hereinafter, such a display is referred to as "design change" or "change display"). This gaming machine shifts to a special game called so-called big hit, in which more prize balls than normal games can be obtained when the combination of symbols when a plurality of rows of symbol fluctuations is stopped becomes a specific mode. Known as one. The variable display of the symbols in the display area is not limited to simply displaying the multiple symbols in a variable manner, but the time for variable display is usually in the state where one more symbol is aligned, such as a so-called reach screen, which is a big hit. It is designed to increase the player's expectation, such as making it longer. In addition, the player's expectation is also enhanced by the effect of giving a story to the variable display by using characters in images such as patterns and the notice effect that suggests a high degree of expectation of transition to the special game in advance. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2003-230714, A

Since a large number of game machines that employ the above-described configuration already exist as conventional models, further improvement in game playability is required in order to differentiate from the conventional models.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of further improving game playability.

A ball game machine according to an aspect of the present invention is based on a game board in which a game area is formed, a starting opening provided in the game area, and a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the starting opening as an opportunity. A win/fail judgment means for performing a win/no judgment to determine whether or not it is possible to shift to a special game which is advantageous to the player, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a symbol display device showing the result of the prize determination by the stop display of the symbol, and the symbol When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the display device, the special game control means for shifting to the special game after the stop display and the probability of the result of the hit determination being a big hit are given probability. Probability state control means for transitioning from a certain normal probability state to a probability variation state in which the probability of a win/loss determination being a big hit is higher than a predetermined probability, and an effect display device capable of displaying effects. There are at least a first big hit symbol and a second big hit symbol as the type of symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big jackpot, and shifts to the probability variation state after the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the first big jackpot symbol. It is possible, it is possible to shift to the normal probability state after the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the second big hit symbol, and to shift from the normal probability state to the probability variation state and then to the normal probability state. If the cumulative number of times the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the probability change continues to reach a predetermined number, the special game executed after the stop display of the first big hit symbol where the cumulative number during the probability change continues to reach a predetermined number While the transition to the normal probability state later, while the cumulative number of times the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the probability variation continuation is less than a predetermined number, the cumulative number of times the probability variation continuation is less than the predetermined number After the special game executed after the stop display is completed, the probability change state is entered after the end of the special game, and while the probability change is in progress, it is possible to execute the expectation suggestive production that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be entered after the end of the special game. The expectation suggestive effect that is executed under a specific situation where the cumulative number of times the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during continuation is a number obtained by subtracting 1 from the predetermined number is that the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the probability variation continuation. The cumulative number of times is less than the predetermined number minus one, which is likely to have a lower expectation than the expectation suggestive performance that is executed in a non-specific situation, or in a specific situation during which the probability change continues Expectation suggestion production is more difficult to be executed than under specific circumstances.

It should be noted that any combination of the above constituent elements, and those in which the constituent elements and expressions of the present invention are mutually replaced among methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. Is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

According to the ball game machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of further improving the game playability.

It is a figure which shows the basic structure in the front side of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the basic structure in the back side of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure showing a functional block of a Pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of a main board. It is a figure which shows the hit/miss determination table typically. It is a figure which shows typically the range setting of the winning/winning lottery value for every setting value. It is a figure which shows a symbol determination table typically. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern table typically. It is a figure which shows typically the prior winning/absence determination table referred by prior winning/absence determination. It is a figure which shows typically the prior winning/absence determination table corresponding to game setting. It is a block diagram showing a configuration of a sub-board. It is a figure which shows the outline of a mobile cooperation system typically. It is a block diagram which shows schematically the hardware constitutions of a main board and a sub-board. It is the block diagram which shows the hardware constitution of the production control device outline. It is a flow chart which shows control start processing of a main substrate in a Pachinko game machine. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation processing of S126 in FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows details of interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows control start processing of a sub board in a Pachinko game machine. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows interruption processing when a command is received from a main board. It is the flowchart which shows the interruption processing when the timer interruption for production display control occurs. It is a flow chart which shows an interruption processing when a sub CPU receives a command from a control CPU. 6 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. It is a flow chart showing a process of special symbol variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of decorative pattern variable display. It is a flowchart showing a process of a special game. It is a flowchart showing a process of a small hit game. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state at the time of fall determination in detail. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state after shifting to a probability variation state and an easy entry state. It is the figure which shows the production display example of the state where it is easy to enter the ball. It is a figure showing in detail the transition of the game state at the end of the easy entry state. It is a figure showing an example of an effect display in the case where the easy-to-enter state ends with the start of the symbol fluctuation as the end of the easy-to-enter state. It is the figure which shows the production display example when the easy entry state ends with the end of the design fluctuation which becomes the end of the easy entry state. It is the figure which shows the production display example when the easy entry state continues even after the end of the design fluctuation which can be the end of the easy entry state. It is the figure which shows the transition of the game state when the fall decision is done after the design fluctuation frequency exceeds the specified number in detail. It is the figure which shows the transition of the game state in detail when the success/failure judgment becomes a big hit after the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number. It is the figure which shows the production display example when the hit decision is big hit after the design fluctuation frequency exceeds the specified number. It is a figure which shows the structure by the side of the front of the pachinko game machine which concerns on a present Example. It is a diagram showing a display example of a winning effect that can be executed during the special game. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of a change of total acquisition number display. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect display which displays that the total number of award balls acquired has reached a predetermined number. It is a diagram showing a display example of the total acquisition number display during the normal game.

(Prerequisite technology)
In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, a plurality of games corresponding to the conventional first-class pachinko gaming machine are mixed. The second game is preferentially executed so that the first game and the second game as the plurality of games are not executed at the same time. Further, in order to achieve both of these playability, a plurality of starting winning openings, a plurality of special symbol display devices, a plurality of holding lamps are provided. It is designed so that the number of big hits in the second game is generally larger than the number of big hits in the first game. For example, the probability that the second game is a big hit with a certain change is high, and the number of unit games that form a special game when the second game is a big hit is large (the time when the special winning opening is opened). A long long opening unit game and a short opening unit game with a short opening time are mixed in one special game, and even if the same number of unit games, the second game is a longer opening unit game than the first game. The second game is designed to have a relatively higher profit than the first game (including the case where there are many numbers). On top of that, first, aiming for the first win in the first game, after the short time is given by the big hit in the first game, repeatedly aiming for the second game to obtain a lot of balls To be realized.

FIG. 1 shows a basic structure on the front side of a pachinko game machine. The pachinko game machine 100 is mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board. The gaming machine frame of the Pachinko gaming machine 100 is an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball plate 105, a lower ball plate 106, a firing handle 107, a speaker 108, a production button 109, a cross key 110, It includes a decorative lamp 111. The outer frame 101 is a frame body having an opening portion for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 100 at a position where it should be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body that is aligned with the opening of the outer frame 101, and is attached to the outer frame 101 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is made of glass or the like and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate 105 has a mechanism for storing the game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball plate 106. The lower ball plate 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right at the upper part of the door 104, and a sound effect and a music sound according to the game state and the effect are output by means for controlling the effect. Most of the resin member forming the exterior of the door 104 is semitransparent, and the decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the transparent portion. The decoration lamp 111 is an LED which emits light in various colors according to the game state, the effect, etc. by means of controlling the effect, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

The game board 80 has a first starting opening 11, a second starting opening 12, a special winning opening 20, a first operating opening 31, a second operating opening 32, and a general winning opening 33 on a game area 81 divided by a rail 82. , The outlet 34, the effect display device 60, and the center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over the substantially central portion of the game area 81 and the upper portion and the right portion thereof, and the flow path of the game ball and the effect display device. It has functions such as protection of 60 and decoration. At the lower part of the center ornament 64, a stage 65 on which the inflowing game balls roll is formed, and depending on how the balls roll, the falling direction from the stage 65 is the direction to enter the first starting port 11 and the first starting port 11 It is distributed to the side direction that does not enter the ball. On the upper part of the center decoration 64, a movable accessory 66 is provided which is driven according to the contents of the effect and performs an operation like an effect. A mechanism such as a plurality of game nails and a windmill (not shown) for forming the flow path of the game ball is installed in the game area 81. In the present specification, "ball entry", "prize" and "drop" may be synonymous with each other. In addition, each prize hole or each ball entrance may be formed of a "passage hole" (also called "gate" or "through chucker") of a type through which a game ball passes. “Prize”, “drop” and “pass” may also be synonymous with each other.

The first starting opening 11 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first game, and the second starting opening 12 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second game. The first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12 are configured so as to be able to aim at one of the balls depending on the strength or weakness of the launch of the game ball according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided at the lower center of the game area 81, and the second starting port 12 is provided immediately below the first starting port 11. When hitting left, that is, when hitting relatively weakly so as to flow to the left passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12, while right-handing That is, if the player hits the ball relatively strongly aiming to flow to the right side passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the second starting opening 12, but cannot enter the first starting opening 11. Or, the flow path is formed by the arrangement of the game nails so that it is difficult to enter the ball. However, since the opening above the second starting port 12 is normally covered with the first starting port 11 and the inflow of game balls is blocked, the second starting port is opened unless the expansion mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened. No. 12 is impossible or difficult to enter. The winning/winning lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a special game which is advantageous to the player over the normal game, and is executed every time a ball is entered into the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. It

The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to such an extent that they can be targeted for either one depending on the strength of the game ball. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be installed separately on the left side and the right side of the game area 81, and a game ball aiming at one may be difficult to enter the other. For example, the first starting port 11 is provided at a position where the ball can enter or can easily enter when left-handed, that is, when the ball is fired relatively weakly so as to flow to the left passage of the center ornament 64. The second starting opening 12 is provided at a position where the ball can enter or can easily enter when the ball is hit to the right, that is, when the ball is relatively strongly fired so as to flow to the right passage of the center ornament 64.

The first starting opening 11 includes a first starting winning detection device 16. The first starting prize detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first starting opening 11, and generates the first starting prize information indicating the entering ball at the time of entering the ball. The second starting opening 12 includes a second starting winning detection device 17, an ordinary electric auditors product 90 (so-called electric tulip) that is an expansion mechanism, and an ordinary electric auditors solenoid 91 for opening and closing the ordinary electric auditors member 90. Prepare The second start winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 12, and generates the second start winning information indicating the entry at the time of entering the ball.

The first operation port 31 is provided at the left side position of the game area 81 and includes the first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects passage of a game ball through the first operation port 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage when the game ball passes. The second operation port 32 is provided at the right side position of the game area 81 and includes the second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operation port 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage when the game ball passes. The passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 is a trigger for the open lottery that determines whether or not to expand the ordinary electric auditors product 90. When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol which is the symbol showing the determination result of the open lottery is variably displayed on the normal symbol display portion 45. Therefore, the open lottery is also called “ordinary symbol lottery”. After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the normal symbols is stopped. When the normal symbol stops with a winning symbol, the driving force of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 expands the normal electric accessory 90, and the possibility of entering the second starting opening 12 increases. As a modified example, the number of actuating ports may be one, and the structure may be provided at the left side position of the game area 81.

Each of the three general winning openings 33 is provided with a general winning detecting device 38 for detecting a winning of a game ball. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates the general winning information indicating the entry at the time of entering.

The special winning opening 20 includes a special winning detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a special winning opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the special winning opening 20. The big winning detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning opening 20, and generates big winning opening winning information indicating the entry at the time of entering. The special winning opening 20 is a horizontal rectangular winning opening that is opened as a "big hit" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined manner. The special winning opening 20 is provided at the upper right position of the outlet 34. As a modified example, another big winning opening may be provided in the lower center of the game area 81 or above or below the big winning opening 20 to provide a plurality of big winning openings. The out port 34 is a discharge port for discharging game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports, and includes an out detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball that is discharged through the out opening 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The outlet 34 is provided at the center bottom end of the game area 81 so that all the game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports can be guided and passed. A plurality of out detection devices 39 may be arranged side by side while securing a game ball passage having a sufficient width to prevent the ball clogging of the out port 34.

Below the outside of the game area 81 in the game board 80, the symbol display unit 120 is arranged. The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display section 41, a second special symbol display section 42, a first special symbol hold display section 71, a second special symbol hold display section 72, a normal symbol display section 45, and a universal symbol. Each display unit such as a hold display unit 75, a game state display unit 76, and an abnormality notification unit 77 is provided. Specifically, the first special symbol display unit 41 corresponding to the first game and the second special symbol display unit 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side at the lower left position, and the first special symbol. Changes in 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first win/loss lot drawing triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 11, and the special game when stopped in a predetermined hit mode. As a big hit occurs. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second win/loss lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 12, and the special game when stopped in a predetermined hit mode. As a big hit occurs. The first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42 are, for example, 8 segment LEDs consisting of 7 segments forming "8" and 1 segment representing "dot". Display device. With an 8-segment LED, a numerical value for 8 bits can be expressed by combining 8 segments. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 represented by a combination of segments do not necessarily have a body of letters or numbers, and may be generally meaningless symbols formed by a combination of each segment. .. These symbols are displayed at the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 in high-speed one after another, or with a predetermined display (for example, "-") and non-display (for example, all lights off). The symbols corresponding to the determination result are displayed after being repeated for a predetermined time, whereby the symbol variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. In addition, the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 using an LED dot array that is not an 8-segment LED, a plurality of types of first special symbol 51 and second in the combination of the lighting pattern and lighting color You may express the special design 52.

Further, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have a role of directing, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol on the lower left of the game area 81. The display unit 42 displays it in a size that is inconspicuous. However, when adopting a method of expressing without using a decorative design by giving a special design role a directing role, the special design is displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of the 8-segment LED. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that allows it.

Above the first special symbol display unit 41, the first special symbol hold display unit 71 is provided as a holding lamp for special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display unit 42, the second special symbol hold unit. The second special figure reservation display section 72 is provided as a special design variation reservation lamp corresponding to the game. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 71 consists of 2 lamps, depending on the number of lighting or blinking, the number of winning and losing lottery values in the first game (hereinafter, the number of holding of winning and losing lottery values is (Also referred to as “holding number”) is displayed. The number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation display unit 71 is the number of times (the number) the lottery value is acquired based on winning the first starting opening 11 during the change of the first special symbol 51 or the execution of the special game. Yes, the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed is shown. The second special figure reservation display section 72 also comprises two lamps, and displays the number of reservations in the second game according to the number of lights or blinks thereof. The number of reservations in the second special symbol reservation display unit 72 is the number of times (the number) the lottery value is acquired based on winning the second starting opening 12 while the second special symbol 52 is changing or during the execution of the special game. Yes, the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed is shown. The number of held winning/winning lottery values is also displayed on the lower part of the screen of the effect display device 60 in a form represented by the number of lit holding lamp images.

A normal symbol display section 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol etc. display unit 120. For the sake of convenience, the normal symbol display portion 45 is composed of two lamps, and the lighting state of the two symbols expresses the normal symbol display state. First, the variation of the normal symbol is expressed by displaying the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time by blinking, and finally the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a combination of the lighting states of the first lamp and the second lamp. Is expressed. For example, a stop pattern of disconnection is expressed by turning on the first lamp and turning off the second lamp, and a first hitting mode is expressed by turning off the first lamp and turning on the second lamp. The second manner of hitting is expressed by lighting both the lamp and the second lamp.

Further, on the right side of the normal symbol display portion 45, a general symbol hold display portion 75 is provided as a hold lamp for the normal symbol fluctuation. The ordinary figure hold display section 75 also comprises two lamps, and displays the number of holding of the normal symbol variation depending on the number of lights or blinks. The number of ordinary symbol fluctuations is the number of game balls that have passed through the first actuation opening 31 or the second actuation opening 32 during the variation of the ordinary symbol, and the number of ordinary symbol lottery in which the variation of the ordinary symbol is not yet executed. Indicates.

The symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game state display section 76 and an abnormality notification section 77. The game state display unit 76 is a display unit that displays a game state such as a specific game state described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, when the probability is fluctuating, the lamp is lit, the blinking display is in the easy entry state, and the off state is displayed in the normal state to notify each game state, and the 7-segment LED is displayed while the special game is being executed. The unit game number (round number) executed in the special game is displayed by. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that notifies a part of the abnormality of the gaming machine, and includes, for example, a plurality of lamps, and notifies the abnormality by a lighting pattern according to the type of the abnormality. It should be noted that these display sections may not be collectively arranged in the symbol display unit 120, but each display section may be configured individually, or may be configured by being divided into a plurality of display devices that are appropriately combined. Further, the notification of the game state such as the specific game state may be configured to be performed only during a predetermined period such as a fixed time after the power is turned off.

At approximately the center of the game area 81, the effect display device 60 is provided so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center decoration 64, and the decorative symbol 61 interlocking with the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 is provided. The fluctuation of the included effect image is displayed. Hereinafter, such a display will be referred to as “design change” or “change display”.

The effect display device 60 is a display device including a liquid crystal display that variably displays the decorative symbol 61 in a manner that is interlocked with the variable display of the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52. The decorative symbol 61 is a symbol for visually producing the determination result display of the lottery indicated by the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The effect display device 60 displays, as the decorative symbol 61, a moving image in which the symbols in a plurality of columns simulating a game of a slot machine are changed in the central area of the screen. In the present embodiment, the symbols composed of the numbers "0" to "9" are displayed in three columns and varied, and the three symbol combinations finally stopped and displayed indicate the hit or the miss. Each of the plurality of patterns constituting the decorative pattern 61 is composed of numbers, characters, or symbols with color or pattern decorations, but for these numbers, characters, or symbols, a pattern or pattern common to all patterns It may be configured in such a manner that a different pattern is added to each and integrated. This pattern is a pattern in which a motif related to the theme of decoration or effect set for the model of the Pachinko gaming machine 100 is drawn, and may be, for example, a pattern in which a character of a person or an animal is drawn. The decorative pattern 61 is switched according to the development of the production, in the case where the design including the design is variably displayed and in the case where the design is separated and only the numbers, characters, and symbols are variably displayed. It may be configured to be. In the background of the variable display of the decorative pattern 61, a moving image having a directing effect related to the theme of the decoration or the effect set for the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the pattern change.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display which is a high-definition dot matrix type display device, but the width of its display area may be about half the width of the game area, or it may be a large size exceeding half. It may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the effect display device is formed with a passage width that allows one game ball to pass through, and if the player hits with the maximum strength as so-called "right hit", the right passage is almost certain. The game ball can be passed to, and it can be distinguished from the so-called "left hit". The effect display device 60 may be configured not only by a single display device but also by a combination of a plurality of display devices. In the case of more than one, it is possible to combine displays of different sizes such as a combination of main liquid crystal and sub liquid crystal, the sub liquid crystal may be arranged in a position adjacent to the main liquid crystal, or a position other than the game board, for example, a firing handle. May be installed in the vicinity (upper bowl, right side decorative lamp, etc.). When installed in the vicinity of the firing handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel on which a player can input operation. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by a display device such as an organic EL display, a mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type, or a display means such as an LED matrix type. .

The effect button 109 is an operation input unit that the player presses to input a predetermined instruction to the game machine according to the effect content, and the effect content or the like is changed according to the pressing mode. The effect button 109 is provided on the front frame 102. The effect button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the effect button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 are arranged in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can be projected. The rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 function as a lever 112 in a state of protruding to the outside, and the player can hold the effect button 109 and pull the lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is an operation input means for the player to input a direction instruction to the gaming machine, and is provided on the outer wall surface on the left side of the upper bowl 105.

An outline of a game method and control flow performed in the gaming machine having the above configuration will be described. When the player turns the firing handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper bowl plate 105 are guided one by one to the rails 82 at a strength according to the turning angle and are shot to the game area 81. .. When the player fixes the turning position of the firing handle 107 by hand, the firing of the game ball is repeated at regular time intervals. A game ball shot to the upper part of the game area 81 hits a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center decoration 64, and the like, and falls in a direction according to the way of hitting. When the game ball falls into each of the general winning opening 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the big winning opening 20, the winning ball according to the type of the winning opening is the upper ball plate 105 or the bottom. It is paid out to the ball plate 106. The game balls that have fallen into the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 33 are processed as safe balls, and the game balls that have dropped into the out opening 34 are processed as out balls. The discharge of the safe balls may be excluded from the detection target of the out detection device 39, or the safe balls may be guided to the area where the out detection device 39 is provided and all the discharge thereof may be detected by the out detection device 39. May be Alternatively, the specification may be such that the safe sphere is not guided and the safe sphere is not detected by the out detection device 39, and the total of the number of safe spheres detected and the number of out spheres is the total number of discharged spheres.

Further, when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display portion 45, and is stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to the display. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hitting mode or the second hitting mode, the normal electric auditors product 90 is expanded based on the hit state of the symbol that is stopped and displayed and the game state when it is stopped and displayed. . That is, when the symbol is in the normal gaming state when the symbol is stopped, and when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode, the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a short period of 0.1 seconds. Moreover, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hitting mode in the specific game state (for example, easy entry state), the normal symbol is the second hitting mode in the normal time and the specific game state (for example, easy entry state). When the stop display is made, the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a long time of 6 seconds. Here, the winning probability of the normal symbol and the execution probability of the long opening are set to be different depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the open lottery in the normal state, the normal symbol wins with a probability of 1/100, and the execution probability of the short opening in that case (probability that the winning symbol in the first hit mode is selected) is 1/ 3, the long open execution probability (probability of selecting the winning symbol of the second hit mode) is set to 2/3. Also, in the open lottery in the specific game state (for example, the easy-to-enter state), the normal symbol wins with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability of the first hitting mode and the second hitting mode is the same as the normal gaming state. However, it is set so that the long release is executed regardless of the winning in any of the modes. In this way, in the easy-to-enter state, the variation function of the winning probability of the normal symbol (probability variation from 1/100 to 99/100) and the extension function of the opening time (the opening time when the stop display is displayed in the first hitting mode are 0 By extending from 1 second to 6.0 seconds), the ease of entering the second starting opening 12 is improved. The function of extending the operation period of the ordinary electric accessory 90 (long open) may be referred to as “open extension”.

As described above, in the normal state, the probability of long opening is higher than the probability of short opening, so that when a normal symbol is won, long opening is executed at a constant rate even in the normal state. .. As a modification, in the normal state, on the contrary, the probability that the short opening may be higher than the long opening probability, the specification that both the probabilities are the same, or the specification that the opening is always short Good. In addition, in the easy-to-enter state, it is possible to further enhance the easiness of entering the second starting opening 12 by using three functions including a function of shortening the variation time of the normal symbol. The variation time of the normal symbol in that case is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state, and 2 seconds in the easy entry state. The winning probability of the open lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the normal electric auditors product 90 may be expanded only when the open lottery is made in the easy-to-enter state. Further, when the normal electric accessory 90 spreads, the fact may be notified in advance, or the suspension of the normal symbol change may be read in advance and notified before the change of the normal symbol is started, or of the normal symbol. It may be notified during the change.

As a modification of the opening mode when the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting opening 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time is increased to about 6 seconds by repeating the opening for 2 seconds, which is longer than the short opening, three times. It may be an aspect. Also, a plurality of combinations of the opening time and the number of times of opening may be prepared and any one of them may be selected. For example, in the case of opening 2 seconds three times, the total opening time is the same as in the case of opening 6 seconds once, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is also included. Therefore, in particular, in the configuration of the modification in which the second starting opening 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, the player who notices the opening has decided that the hitting direction has been adjusted to the second starting opening 12 from that point onward, and the former enters the ball. It can be said that the opportunity is long. Further, it may be configured such that there are a plurality of hitting types of the normal symbols, and the opening mode of the expanding mechanism may be different depending on the hitting type. For example, if the normal pattern is the first hit, 0.1 seconds open once in the normal state, 1 second open 3 times in the easy-to-enter state, and the second hit, normal state 6 seconds open once, and 2 seconds open twice in the easy-to-enter state.

On the other hand, when entering the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52 in the first special symbol display unit 41, the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60. , And the decorative pattern 61 are variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to the display. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to a variation pattern in which the variation mode from the variation start to the stop is determined. The decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed according to the variation effect pattern in which the variation mode from the variation start to the variation is defined. Plural kinds of fluctuation patterns and fluctuation production patterns are prepared, and each of them has various fluctuation times. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to the variation pattern, the decorative symbol 61 is variably displayed according to the variation effect pattern having the same variation time. In the variation pattern, the variation display time is set for each pattern as the ending condition of the symbol variation, and the variation of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 when the variation display time elapses. Be stopped. Hereinafter, the variable display of the decorative pattern 61 displayed according to the variable effect pattern will be illustrated, and the variable effect pattern will be briefly described. The details of the method of determining the variation pattern and the variation effect pattern will be described separately.

As an example of the variable display of the decorative design 61, first, the design is varied in all three columns like the reel rotation of the slot machine at the start of the variation, and when the variation end timing is approached, the final stop mode is stopped by one column at a time. The symbol combination is displayed. In addition, as an operation at the time of the variation stop of the decorative pattern 190, it may be controlled so as to stop at a plurality of columns at the same time, not one column at a time, and attention may be given to the effect display other than the decorative symbol during the variable display, with a shorter variation time. You may make it possible to display a symbol variation. Further, as the operation at the time of starting the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 190, the fluctuation start of some columns is controlled to be delayed in accordance with the subsequent development in the fluctuation (type of the effect pattern, etc.) so as to produce an expected feeling. You can

Next, the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. The variation effect pattern includes a normal out effect effect pattern, a reach out effect effect pattern, and a reach jackpot effect effect pattern. The normal deviation effect pattern is an effect pattern when a normal deviation symbol combination is displayed. The out-of-reach effect pattern is an effect pattern for displaying an out-of-symbol combination through the reach state, which is a big hit if one more symbol is aligned. The reach jackpot effect pattern is an effect pattern when a jackpot pattern combination is displayed through the reach state. In particular, patterns that go through a reach state include patterns with various long and short fluctuation times.A reach pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is called "normal reach", and a reach pattern with a long fluctuation time is called "super reach." ". The normal deviation effect pattern, the reach deviation effect pattern, and the reach jackpot effect pattern each include a normal pattern displayed in the normal state and a time saving pattern displayed in the time saving state. However, even in the normal state, if it is the second symbol variation corresponding to the ball entering the second starting opening 12, the probability that the big hit is accompanied by a certain change or the probability that the number of unit games of special games will increase is the first. Since it can be said that the chance state is higher than the first fluctuation corresponding to the entry into the first starting opening 11, it is possible to use a chance effect pattern that indicates that it is a chance to generate a relatively advantageous big hit. In the embodiment, the time saving pattern is used in the time saving state, but since the probability changing state involves time saving, the time saving pattern is also used in the probability changing state. However, in the modification, the specification may use a probability variation pattern different from the time saving pattern in the probability variation state. Alternatively, the specifications may be such that a common pattern is used for both the time saving and the probability variation, or the specification for using the probability variation pattern in the probability variation state may be used without using the time saving pattern.

In addition, when the number of held winning/winning lottery becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol variation time in the case of a deviation is shortened in order to improve game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as “shortening variation”). Similarly, when the number of winning/holding lottery becomes four, the symbol variation time in the case of deviation is further shortened compared to the case of the above three in order to further improve the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "ultra-shortening variation"). ). After the symbol variation described above, when the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52 at the time of stop, and the decorative symbol 61 are in a stop mode showing a big hit, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to the special game, and the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening 20 is started. The stop mode of the decorative design 61 indicating a big hit is, for example, a combination mode in which the types of the three designs match.

There are two types of special games, a normal special game and a shortened special game, and there are large differences in the profits depending on the winning prize balls. The normal special game is started by displaying an effect screen called a start demo time. After the start demonstration time is displayed on the screen, the special winning opening 20 is opened, and the opening is continued for about 30 seconds, or after 9 or more game balls are dropped, it is once closed. The opening to closing of the special winning opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but a plurality of short-time openings may be repeated during one unit game. After the opening and closing of the special winning opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 or 16 times, the normal special game is ended by the display of the effect screen called the end demo time. In the normal special game, you can expect 9 or more balls to enter per unit game, and you can get enough prize balls (also called "outgoing ball") by 16 unit games. Is obtained. The special game in which the unit game is repeated 16 times is also appropriately referred to as "16R jackpot", and the special game in which the unit game is repeated 4 times is appropriately referred to as "4R jackpot". Although the unit game is repeated 16 times, a small number of unit games are substantially repeated by opening the special winning opening 20 for a time shorter than usual (for example, 1.6 seconds) in some unit games. It is also possible to realize a normal special game similar to that (sometimes referred to as a "substantial nR jackpot").

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demo time and the end demo time are short or almost none (0.1 seconds, etc.), and the special winning opening 20 is opened for 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice to end the shortened special game. In the shortened special game, since the special winning opening 20 is only opened twice for a very short time, the special winning opening 20 can hardly enter the ball, and the special playing is substantially equal to zero. is there. The special game in which the unit game is repeated twice is also referred to as "2R jackpot" as appropriate. Although the number of unit games is the same as the normal special game, the shortened special game can be realized by opening the special winning opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all the unit games.

Further, through the above-mentioned symbol variation, when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of the stop are predetermined small hit patterns, a small hit game composed of one unit game Then, the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening 20 is executed. In one unit game that constitutes the small hit game, the special winning opening 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds, and the appearance is similar to that of the 2R big hit.

If the special game occurs and the hit stop symbol at that time is in a specific mode (for example, "777"), the probability change, which is one of the specific games, is further started after the special game is finished. During the probability change, a win/loss lottery having a higher probability of winning than the normal probability state is performed, and a new special game may occur relatively early. It should be noted that the determination result of the winning/disapproval lottery may not be a specific big hit, that is, a big hit accompanied by a certainty change, but may not be explicitly shown in the appearance, and may be a latent probability change state that is not explicitly notified as a decorative design or effect contents. In this case, the effect display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether there is a probable change or a non-probable change even during the probable change. In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it may be clearly indicated on the effect display device 60 whether it is a probable change or a non-probable change.

In the normal game after the special game is finished, the easy-to-enter state, which is one of the specific game states, is started. In the easy-to-enter state, the winning probability of the open lottery is increased more than usual, and the extension of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is extended and extended. The number of hits of the normal symbol per certain time can be increased, and the easiness of entering the second starting port 12 is also increased, so that the number of entering the second starting port 12 is also likely to increase. Therefore, as a result of increasing the chances of winning a prize ball by entering the second starting opening 12, it is possible to keep playing with little ball reduction or little by little.

In the easy entry state, as one of the specific game states, a so-called time saving, in which the variation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened compared to the normal state, is further executed. The variation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is returned to the original variation time after a predetermined number of variations, for example, 100 variations display, but reaches the number of variations. If a big hit happens before, the time saving will end. Because the variation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened in a short time, compared to the case of the normal state in which the symbol variation is performed with the normal variation time, until a big hit occurs. Can be shortened and the jackpot can be easily obtained relatively easily. In a modified example, the specification may be such that the special symbol is not shortened in the easy entry state.

FIG. 2 shows a basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine. The power switch 150 is a switch for turning on/off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and particularly processes all the game operations such as lottery when winning the first start opening 11 and the second start opening 12. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151, controls the display contents on the effect display device 60, and changes the effect display contents particularly according to the determination result by the main board 200. The back setting mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, a payout device 154 for paying out prize balls, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball plate 105 in accordance with the winning of each winning opening. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The shooting device 156 shoots the stored balls of the upper ball plate 105 to the game area 81 one by one. The firing control board 157 controls the firing operation of the firing device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies electric power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. A performance display unit 159 is provided on the substrate of the main substrate 200. The performance display unit 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number indicating the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of fire balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls.

A setting changing device 170 is provided on the substrate of the main substrate 200. The setting changing device 170 is a device for changing the setting to any of a plurality of settings (also referred to as game settings) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. As game settings, for example, six-stage settings (setting 1 to setting 6) are prepared, and the probability of a big hit can be varied according to the game settings. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specification can be for the player. When the jackpot probabilities from the settings 1 to 6 are M1 to M6, M1≦M2≦M3 The jackpot probability of each setting can be determined so that ≦M4≦M5≦M6. It is not essential to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 has a setting key cylinder 171 into which a setting key possessed by an employee of a game store is inserted, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to any one of a plurality of game settings, and a set setting value. It includes a setting display unit 173 that lights and displays, and a setting memory that stores the set value that has been set. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turn key type switch for shifting to a state where the setting can be changed (hereinafter referred to as “setting change state”) or a state where the setting can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as “setting confirmation state”). First, when the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171, and the setting key is turned to be in the on state, and then the power switch 150 is turned on, the state is changed to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In order to shift to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as “RWM clear switch”). On the other hand, to shift to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the state is changed to the setting change state, the number “1” indicating the setting 1 is displayed as the initial value of the game setting on the setting display portion 173, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172. The setting display unit 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a one-digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed once, the setting value displayed on the setting display portion 173 is changed in order such as 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→.... When the setting key inserted in the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the OFF state after the setting is changed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory and the setting change is confirmed. , The game is ready. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is not switched and the setting cannot be changed. After that, when the setting key inserted in the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the original state and turned off, the game becomes possible. In addition, when the setting key is turned off so that the player can play the game, the setting display portion 173 is turned off, and the current set value cannot be visually recognized.

The setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch being pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key OFF state), the RAM clear is executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is being pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key ON state), the RAM is cleared and the setting is changed. If the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key off state, the power is restored without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not pressed and the power is turned on in the setting key-on state, the setting confirmation state is entered. The setting display unit 173 may also be used as the performance display unit 159. In this case, the dual-purpose display unit may function as the performance display unit 159 in the playable state, and may function as the setting display unit 173 in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, the setting change device 170 may not be provided so that the game settings cannot be changed.

<Function block>
FIG. 3 shows functional blocks of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Hereinafter, the function realized by using each configuration will be described. In this specification, in order to match the physical configuration with the functional configuration, for example, the physical configuration such as the main board 200, the payout control board 155, and the firing control board 157. For the parts already explained as above, the terms may be used as they are for convenience.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 is a power supply board 158 that generates power to be used in the gaming machine based on an AC power supply (AC24V or the like) supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and a main controller that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. Main board 200, a payout control board 155 as a frame control device for controlling the prize ball payout, a launch control board 157 for controlling the launch of the game ball to the game area, and controlling the production operation and processing. The sub-board 300 as a sub-control device is configured to share the functions.

The main board 200 includes a first starting opening 11, a second starting opening 12, a special winning opening 20, a first working opening 31, a second working opening 32, a general winning opening group (first general winning opening 33a, second general winning opening 33a). It is electrically connected to the mouth 33b), the outlet 34, the symbol display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the firing control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a prize ball payout signal or a signal indicating the control state of the main board 200 transmitted from the main board 200 to indirectly control the launch control board 157. And the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154 is controlled. The payout device 154 includes a payout motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launching device 156, and the ball feeding device 164, and based on the launch permission signal and the like transmitted from the payout control substrate 155, the ball feeding device 164 and the launching device. The device 156 is controlled to launch a game ball. The sub-board 300 is electrically connected to the effect display device 60, the movable accessory 66 (the drive motor 67, the position detection sensor 68), the speaker 108, the effect input operation device 115 (the effect button 109, the cross key 110), the decorative lamp 111. And various control signals are transmitted to and received from each of them.

Data transmission/reception between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is in one direction from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300. It is arranged on the sub-board 300. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub-board 300 to the configuration included in the main board 200. I can't make a request. Therefore, the sub-board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. Data is bidirectionally transmitted and received between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155 and between the payout control board 155 and the firing control board 157. However, as in the case of between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300, data transmission and reception in one direction from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155, and one direction from the payout control board 155 to the firing control board 157 are performed. Data may be transmitted and received.

The functional blocks included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the firing control board 157, and the sub-board 300 described below are merely examples, and as a modification, some of the functional blocks may be replaced with other boards. It may be installed. For example, the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional blocks included in the firing control board 157 may be mounted on the payout control board 155. Good. Further, for example, a part of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the main board 200, or the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155. May be divided into a plurality of substrates, and one functional block may be configured as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination unit 201, a performance display unit 159, a random number generation unit 202, a first lottery unit 211, a second lottery unit 212, a preliminary determination unit 235, a public figure lottery unit 213, a hold control unit 240, and a main. Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small hit game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening/closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, The main error detection means 284, the setting change means 286, the setting confirmation means 287, and the command communication means 205 are provided.

<Entering ball determining means 201>
The entry determination means 201 determines the entry of a game ball into each winning opening. When the ball determining means 201 receives the first start winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the first starting opening 11, and when the second starting winning information is received, the game ball has won the second starting opening 12. to decide. The winning determination means 201 determines that the game ball has won the special winning opening 20 when the special winning opening winning information is received, and determines that the gaming ball has won the general winning opening 33 when receiving the general winning information. Upon receiving the passage information, the entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operating opening 31 or the second operating opening 32. Upon receipt of the discharge information, the entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the outlet 34. The entry ball determining means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launch balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls, and displays it on the performance display unit 159. The incoming ball determination means 201, when the probability of being a big hit is the normal probability state and the normal incoming ball state (so-called low probability and low low ball entry state), "the number of payout balls"/"the number of outballs"*100. The value of is displayed on the performance display unit 159. Therefore, the performance display unit 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random number generation means 202>
The random number generation means 202 generates a random number to be used for various determinations in the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the universal figure lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generation means 202 uses random numbers (also referred to as “win/win lottery value”) from “0” to “65535” as the random numbers used in the win/win lottery by the first win/loss determination means 221 and the second win/loss determination means 222. A random number in the range is generated by a predetermined means. In addition, the random number generation means 202, as a random number (also referred to as "symbol determination lottery value") used in the symbol determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227, "0" to "255". Random numbers in the range up to are generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 uses "0" to "255" as the random number (also referred to as "variation pattern determination lottery value") used in the determination of the variation pattern by the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232. A random number in the range up to is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 uses a predetermined means to generate a random number in the range of "0" to "99" as a random number used in the winning/winning lottery by the universal figure lottery means 213. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "2" by the predetermined means as a random number used when determining the normal symbol. The “random number” here is a pseudo random number such as a physical random number generated by a random number generation circuit or a true random number in a mathematical sense, or a random number using a 16-bit counter or a software random number using a random number generation algorithm. But it's okay. Alternatively, it may be a random number generated by combining a hardware random number and a software random number. The random numbers acquired by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 may be random numbers generated by the same generating means, or may be random numbers generated by another generating means. ..

<Public drawing lottery means 213>
The general drawing lottery means 213, when the game ball passes through the first operating opening 31 or the second operating opening 32, a random number used for the normal symbol winning/winning lottery and a random number used for determining the normal symbol stopping symbol are generated by the random number generating means. It is acquired from 202 and lottery is executed. The normal symbol lottery means 213 is a normal symbol determination table (not shown) that is referred to for determining whether or not the normal symbol is normal symbol determination that is referred to for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. Holds the table and. Correspondence between the lottery value for winning and winning lottery and the winning is normally set in the normal symbol determination table, and the correspondence between the lottery value for stopping symbol determination and the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol determination table, respectively, as described above. Based on the hit probability and the symbol selection probability, the winning/stopping of the normal symbol and the stop symbol are determined. If the lottery value for the winning/discarding lottery of the ordinary symbol corresponds to the hit, the ordinary symbol lottery means 213 determines the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol by referring to the ordinary symbol determination table, and the lottery value for the winning/discharging lottery of the ordinary symbol is When it corresponds to the deviation, the mode of the deviation pattern of 1 is always determined. The result of the hit determination of the normal symbol corresponds to the hit, and when the normal symbol stops in a predetermined symbol (first hit mode or second hit mode), the opening and closing control means 275, which will be described later, is the mode of the stop symbol and the game state. Accordingly, the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting opening 12 is opened. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds when the opening is short and 6 seconds when the opening is long. The lottery value of the normal symbol is temporarily held by the holding control means 240 described later. However, the lottery value is withheld only when the predetermined upper limit number of suspensions by the suspension control means 240 is not exceeded.

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211, as a function of executing the first lottery related to the first game, the first lottery value acquisition means 216, the first winning/disagreement determination means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, the first variation pattern determination. The means 231 is included, and the first win/win lottery is executed as the win/win lottery corresponding to the entry into the first starting opening 11. Based on the results of various kinds of lottery by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 causes the first special symbol display section 41 to perform variable display of the first special symbol 51. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication unit 205, the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second winning/disagreement determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and corresponds to entering the second starting opening 12. The second winning/winning lottery is executed as the winning/winning lottery. Based on the results of various kinds of lottery by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 causes the second special symbol display section 42 to perform variable display of the second special symbol 52. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication unit 205, the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60.

<First lottery value acquisition means 216 and second lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires a random number for various kinds of lottery and determination by the first lottery means 211 from the random number generation means 202 upon the entry into the first starting opening 11. Specifically, the first hit/miss lottery value for hit/damage determination by the first hit/miss determination means 221, the first symbol lottery value for stopping mode determination of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determination means 226, the first variation pattern The first pattern lottery values for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determination means 231 are acquired from the corresponding random number generation means. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires random numbers for various kinds of lottery and determination by the second lottery means 212 from the random number generation means 202 upon the entry into the second starting opening 12. Specifically, the second winning/losing lottery value for winning/unlocking determination by the second winning/winning determination means 222, the second symbol lottery value for stopping mode determination of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determining means 227, the second variation pattern The second pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determination means 232 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation means.

The first win/loss determination means 221 executes a win/loss determination to determine whether to shift to the special game, based on the first win/loss lottery value. The second win/loss determination means 222 executes a win/loss determination to determine whether or not to shift to the special game, based on the second win/loss lottery value. More specifically, in the winning/judgment determination, more specifically, "big hit" indicating that the special game is started, "small hit" indicating that the small hit game is started, and "not hitting the special game or small hit game" is shown. It is determined which of the “off” is applicable. The first hit/miss judgment unit 221 and the second hit/miss judgment unit 222 hold a hit/miss judgment table that is referred to in the hit/miss judgment. In addition, in order to distinguish the win/loss determination executed at the time of starting the symbol variation from the advance win/loss determination to be described later, it is appropriately referred to as “win/win determination as main determination”. In the present specification, when referring to “table” or “selection criterion”, the correspondence relationship between the first parameter such as a lottery value and the second parameter such as a value indicating an option is strictly defined in a table structure. Not only data, but also a case where such correspondence is realized by a program structure for deriving the second parameter from the first parameter is widely included. Including these, the concept is substantially synonymous with “table” and is appropriately referred to as “selection criterion”. When a table structure is used, the selection criterion that is substantially one type may be configured by a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables. Shows the number of substantial types of tables, not the number of tables that have been converted.

The first hit determination unit 221 and the second hit determination unit 222 hold tables corresponding to each hit determination as the hit determination tables referred to in the hit determination. Specifically, a win/loss determination table (also referred to as a “first win/loss determination table”) for win/loss determination by the first win/loss determination unit 221 and a win/loss determination table for win/loss determination by the second win/loss determination unit 222 (“second (Also referred to as a win/loss judgment table), and a table to be referred to is selected according to the win/loss judgment to be executed. The plurality of win/loss determination tables are associated with the determination results of big hit, small hit, and out and the win/loss lottery value, and the win/loss probability is determined according to the associated big hit range setting. Further, a plurality of types of win/loss determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings are prepared. For example, for each of the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6, the win/loss determination table in which the correspondence relationship between the win/loss lottery value and the win/loss determination result is different. Is prepared. In addition, when the probability of a big hit, a small hit, and a miss is the same among a plurality of game settings, a win/loss determination table common to a plurality of game settings may be prepared.

FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the hit/miss determination table. This figure shows a win/loss determination table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a win/loss determination table corresponding to setting 6. In the win/loss judgment table of this figure, the jackpot, small hit, and miss determination results and win/win lottery values are associated with each other. The big hit win probability and the small hit win probability are set according to the associated range settings. Is determined. The first win/loss determination means 221 and the second win/loss determination means 222 refer to the win/loss determination table of this figure in the win/fail determination as the main determination. In both the first win/loss lottery by the first win/loss determination means 221 and the second win/loss lottery by the second win/loss determination means 222, the jackpot is usually won only when the win/win lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299. At the time of probability change, the range of the big hit is expanded, and not only when the winning/winning lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299, but also when the win/win lottery value falls within the range of 300 to 2999. In this way, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the gaming state. In the figure, a single hit/miss judgment table shows both the normal and probabilistic big hit ranges, but the hit/miss judgment table may be prepared separately for normal time and for probability change. You may separately prepare for 1 win/loss lottery and 2nd win/loss lottery.

In the present embodiment, even if the winning/winning lottery value does not fall within the big hit range, if it falls within the predetermined range, a small win is awarded. In the example of this figure, when the win/loss lottery value acquired by the first win/loss determination means 221 falls within the range of 56500-65535, a small win is achieved, and the win/loss lottery value acquired by the second win/loss determination means 222 is 64000-65535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the first winning/winning lottery has a wider range corresponding to the small hit than the second winning/winning lottery, and the small winning is more likely to occur. In this way, if it does not correspond to the big hit, it is originally all “out”, but in the example of this figure, the range of win/win lottery values when it does not correspond to the big hit Is particularly referred to as “out”. In other words, when the “win or lose” is regarded from the viewpoint of “whether or not it is a big hit”, the “small hit” may be included in a broad sense of “out” in the sense that it is not a big hit. Further, when the “win/win” is grasped from the viewpoint of “whether or not to win”, the “small hit” may be included in the “hit” in a broad sense together with the “big hit”. It should be noted that, although an example in which the determination table for determining whether or not a big hit and the determination table for determining a small hit are realized in the form of a single hit/miss determination table is shown in this figure, each table may be realized as a separate table. Good. Further, the "small hit" may be provided in only one of the first game and the second game, or may not be provided in any game. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding hit/miss determination table.

FIG. 6 schematically shows a range setting of win/win lottery values for each set value. This figure (a) shows the correspondence of the 1st winning/discarding lottery value and the winning/discarding judgment result which the 1st winning/discarding determination means 221 acquires. This figure (b) shows the correspondence between the second win/loss lottery value acquired by the second win/loss determination means 222 and the win/loss judgment result. The range of the first winning/winning lottery value and the second winning/winning lottery value, which is a big hit in the normal time and the probability variation, is 0 to 294 if the setting value is "1", 0 to 295 if the setting value is "2", and the setting value is " If it is "3", it is 0-296, if it is the setting value "4", it is 0-297, if it is the setting value "5", it is 0-298, and if it is the setting value "6", it is 0-299. Therefore, the larger the set value, the larger the range of the winning/winning lottery value which is a big hit in the normal time, and the higher the probability of being the big hit in the normal time. Further, the range of the first winning/winning lottery value and the second winning/winning lottery value, which is a big hit (that is, is out of the normal state) only at the time of probability change, may be 295 to 2949 if the set value is "1", and the set value is "2". 296 to 2959, setting value "3" to 297 to 2969, setting value "4" to 298 to 2979, setting value "5" to 299 to 2989, setting value "6", It is 300-2999. Therefore, the larger the set value is, the larger the range of the winning/winning lottery value which is a big hit at the time of probability change, and the higher the probability of being the big hit at the time of probability change. The range of the winning/winning lottery value is set such that the ratio of the normal jackpot probability that is a jackpot in the normal time and the probability variation jackpot probability that is a jackpot in the probability variation is constant regardless of the set value. In this figure, the range of the winning/winning lottery values is set so that the probability of jackpot probability at the time of probability variation is 10 times that of the jackpot at normal times, and is common to all the set values “1” to “6”. .. Further, the range of the winning/winning lottery value is set such that the probability of a small hit is also constant regardless of the set value. For all the set values "1" to "6", a small hit occurs when the range of the first win/loss lottery value is 56500-65535, and a small hit when the range of the second win/loss lottery value is 64000-65535. It becomes a hit. The range of the winning/winning lottery value outside the range of the big win or the small win is “out”. In this figure, the jackpot probability is made different for each set value, but the correspondence relationship between the win/no win lottery value and the win/no win determination result may be set so that the big hit probability is the same between different set values.

<First symbol determining means 226 and second symbol determining means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the stopped symbol at the start of fluctuation of the symbol, based on the result of the symbol lottery value and the winning/deciding determination acquired from the random number generating means 202. .. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables that are referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determination unit 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the result of the winning/non-judgment determination by the first winning/prohibiting determining unit 221, and the second symbol determining unit 227 holds the winning/prohibiting result of the second winning/improper determining unit 222. A plurality of symbol determination tables corresponding to the determination result are held. The first hit/miss determination means 221 holds a big hit time first symbol judgment table referred to during a big hit, a small hit time first symbol judgment table referred to during a small hit, and a disengagement first symbol judgment table referred to during a miss. The second hit determination means 222 holds a big hit time second symbol judgment table referred to during a big hit, a small hit time second symbol judgment table referred to during a small hit, and a disengagement second symbol judgment table referred to during disengagement. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 select the symbol determination table to be referred to according to the result of the hit/miss determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination executed when starting the symbol variation from the prior symbol determination to be described later, it is also appropriately referred to as “the symbol determination as the main determination”.

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the symbol determination table. FIG. 7A is a table to be referred to when the win/loss determination result is a big hit, FIG. 7B is a table to be referred to when the win/loss determination result is missed, and FIG. It is a table to be referred to when the hit/no hit determination result is a small hit. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of this figure in the symbol determination as the main determination. In each symbol determination table, the correspondence between the numbers "0" to "10" indicating the type of the special symbol and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value is defined. The types of special symbols are associated with jackpot, small hit, and hit/miss judgment results, respectively, and "0" to "4" correspond to big hits, and "5" to "9" correspond to small hits. "10" corresponds to the disconnection. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of generally meaningless symbols formed by a combination of segments.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the special symbol types “0” to “4” are associated with the big hit and the presence or absence of probability fluctuation after the big hit. Specifically, the type “0” indicates a 16R big hit with a certain change as a specific big hit, and is associated with “0 to 99” in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and “0 to 0” in the case of the second symbol lottery value. 144". Type “1” indicates a 4R big hit (or “substantially 4R hit”) with a certain change as a specific big hit, and is associated with “100 to 149” in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and in the case of the second symbol lottery value. It is associated with “145 to 149”. The type "2" indicates a 2R big hit with a certainty change, and the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value are both "150 to 189" and the type "2" is associated. The type "3" indicates a 16R big hit without a regular change as a normal big hit, and the type "3" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "150 to 189". The type "4" indicates a 4R big hit that does not normally occur as a big hit, and the type "4" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "230 to 255". In this way, the selection probability for each jackpot type (that is, the contents of the jackpot and the presence or absence of subsequent probability fluctuation) is determined by the size of the range of the symbol lottery value.

It is also possible to provide more types of special symbols, and in that case, one jackpot type is determined corresponding to a plurality of types of special symbols, thereby increasing the symbol types and It is possible to set a small number of types. Alternatively, it is also possible to subdivide into more jackpot types corresponding to the increased symbol types. Furthermore, it is possible to provide different symbol types at the time of the first lottery and at the time of the second lottery. In this case, one jackpot type is determined so as to correspond to each of the special symbol types selected in the first lottery and the special symbol types selected in the second lottery. However, it is desirable to set the probability variation ratios to be the same in the first lottery and the second lottery.

As shown in FIG. 7B, the type “10” is associated with the symbol lottery values in the entire range in the case where the hit/miss determination result is out. Therefore, it is determined that the same special symbol is always stopped and displayed in the case of disengagement. It should be noted that it is possible to provide a plurality of special symbols that are stopped and displayed in the case of detachment.

As shown in FIG. 7C, the special symbol types “5” to “9” are associated with the small hit. The type “5” is associated with the symbol lottery value range “0 to 49”, and the type “6” is associated with the symbol lottery value range “50 to 99”. The type "7" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "100 to 149", the type "8" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "150 to 199", and the type "9" is the range of symbol lottery values. It is associated with “200 to 255”.

In the present embodiment, in order to save the storage area in the main board 200, the table of FIG. 7 is referred to as a preliminary symbol determination table also in the preliminary symbol determination. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 indicate that the value of “0” to “10” indicating the type of the special symbol as the result of the preliminary symbol determination is the first win/loss lottery or the second win/loss lottery. It transmits to the effect determination means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of holdings. As the preliminary symbol determination table, one that can be further subdivided to enable complex determination, or one that simplifies the determination range of the jackpot symbols that execute similar special games may be used. .. Further, when the symbols are uniformly set in the case of disengagement as in the present embodiment, without referring to the obtained symbol lottery value, and without preparing a symbol determination table for disengagement, a specific symbol is displayed. You may decide.

<First fluctuation pattern determination means 231 and second fluctuation pattern determination means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determination unit 231 acquires from the random number generation unit 202 a variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the effect display device 60 is determined. It is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on one pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determination unit 232, the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60 is defined, as the second pattern lottery value acquired from the random number generation unit 202. Based on this, it is decided among a plurality of fluctuation patterns. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 each determine the variation pattern of the symbol variation by referring to the variation pattern table when starting the symbol variation. In addition, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 perform a preliminary pattern determination of which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first variation pattern determining unit 231, the second variation pattern determining unit 232, and the control unit of the main board 200 refer to the variation pattern table to determine the variation pattern when the variation start condition is satisfied, and the start port. Preliminary pattern determination tables used for generating information for determining execution of the prefetching process at the time of entering the ball are respectively retained or shared. In the variation pattern, the variation time from the variation start to the variation stop when the special symbol is variably displayed is set, and the variation time has various long and short variation times. In other words, in each variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation is defined, in effect, the variation display time is defined for each pattern as the condition for ending the symbol variation, and the special symbol when the variation display time elapses. Fluctuations are stopped. The variation pattern determination executed when starting the symbol variation is also appropriately referred to as “variation pattern determination as main determination” in order to distinguish it from the prior pattern determination. In addition, in order to contribute to the selection of a variation effect pattern of a decorative pattern, which will be described later, the variation time may be defined as a variation pattern of a different type even though the variation time is the same.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing the variation pattern table. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 refer to the table of FIG. 7A in the normal state and refer to the table of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), if the result of the judgment is wrong in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, select "super 1" which is the super reach of the pattern range number "0", If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "super 2" which is the super reach of the pattern range number "1" is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, the normal reach “Normal 1” of the pattern range number “2” is selected, and if the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, the normal reach of the pattern range number “3” is “Normal”. Select 2”. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, the pattern range number "4" "out of reach" is selected. As for "reach without loss", different fluctuation patterns are selected according to the number of holdings. When the number of holdings is 0 to 2, a fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds, when the number of holdings is 3, a fluctuation pattern of 7 seconds, the number of holdings. When is 4, a variation pattern of 4 seconds is selected.

In this figure, an example in which the variation time is mainly classified into five types will be described. However, a plurality of variation effect patterns are prepared for each variation pattern in the sub-board 300, and there are dozens of variation effect patterns as a whole. Is equivalent to being associated with the lottery value range of each classification.

The range of the pattern lottery values assigned to “normal 1”, “normal 2”, and “out of reach” also differs depending on the number of holdings. When the number of holdings is 0 or 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of holdings increases, the lottery value range of “normal 1” “normal 2” becomes narrower, and the lottery value of “out of reach” The range becomes wider. The smaller the number of holdings is, the wider the lottery value range of the variation pattern having the relatively long variation time is, and the higher the probability that the variation pattern having the longer variation time is selected. Therefore, the smaller the number of holdings, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of holdings, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using the variation pattern table in which the correspondence relationship between the pattern lottery value range and the variation pattern is different for each number of reservations, it is possible to realize control in which a variation pattern having a long variation time is easily selected when the number of reservations is small.

In the normal state, when the result of judgment of winning is 4R jackpot or 16R jackpot, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, "super 1" which is the super reach of the pattern range number "5" is selected and the pattern lottery value is If it is 124 to 248, "super 2" which is the super reach of the pattern range number "6" is selected. When the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, "normal 1" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "7" is selected, and when the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, "normal reach" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "8" is selected. Select 2”.

In the normal state, when the result of judgment of win or defeat is 2R big hit or small hit, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, "super 3" which is the super reach of the pattern range number "9" is selected, and the pattern lottery value is If it is 123 to 255, "normal 3" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "10" is selected.

When the first variation pattern determination unit 231 and the second variation pattern determination unit 232 transmit the pre-determination result as the so-called pre-reading result to the performance determination unit 303, the value (0-10) of the pattern range number is set to the first hit or reject. A value indicating whether it is a lottery or a second winning/discarding lottery and the number of holdings are transmitted. In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, a table is provided for each win/no win determination result in the advance pattern determination, but the random number value is approximately 1 using the one advance pattern determination table regardless of the win/loss result. It is possible to derive only the information regarding to which range the position is located, and the control means side of the sub-board 300 may perform control so as to determine what variation is to be executed together with the result of the advance hit determination.

In the variation pattern table of FIG. 8B that is referred to in the time saving state, the pattern lottery values are allotted to the variation patterns for time saving. However, the correspondence relationship between the range of the pattern lottery value and the variation time is the same as that in FIG. 8A, except for “reach-less deviation shortening” which is selected by deviation. The “reach-less deviation shortening” is a fluctuation pattern of a relatively short fluctuation time, which is associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as the “reach-less deviation” in FIG. 8A. Also for "reach-less out-of-reach shortening", different fluctuation patterns are selected depending on the number of holdings. When the number of holdings is 0 or 1, a fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds, and when the number of holdings is 2 to 4, a fluctuation pattern of 1 second Are selected respectively. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or the different variation pattern tables may be referred to according to the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery, and the second lottery is processed with priority over the first lottery, the first lottery is processed in spite of a time-saving condition. The situation in which the suspension of the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is continuously executed is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the deviation variation in the first lottery in the easy-to-enter state, the variation pattern table is selected such that a variation pattern for a long time (for example, 10 seconds) that does not shorten the variation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of holdings. It may be that.

<Holding control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4, the holding control means 240 includes a special figure holding means 241 and a general figure holding means 242. When the first win/loss lot value or the second win/loss lottery value is newly acquired, the special figure holding means 241 changes the symbol corresponding to the first win/win lottery value or the second win/loss lottery value acquired before that time. When is displayed, the start of the symbol fluctuation corresponding to the newly acquired first win/win lottery value or the second win/win lottery value is suspended, and the win/win lottery value is stored until the variable display start of the corresponding symbol. Here, for each of the first special symbols, each with an upper limit of four, the first winning/missing lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are stored, and with respect to the second special symbol, each with an upper limit of four, The second winning/unwinning lottery value, the second symbol lottery value, and the second pattern lottery value are stored. The universal figure holding means 242 stores the universal figure lottery value acquired by the universal figure lottery means 213 as a reserve ball. These numbers of reservations are represented by the number of lights or blinks of the first special figure reservation display unit 71, the second special figure reservation display unit 72, and the general figure reservation display unit 75, respectively. The number of holdings by the special figure holding means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60.

The lottery value of the second winning/winning lottery held in the special figure holding means 241 is preferentially consumed over the lottery value of the first winning/winning lottery, and the symbol variation is displayed. Therefore, even if the lottery value for the big hit is held as the first win/win lottery, as long as the lottery value is held as the second win/win lottery, the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot lottery value for the first win/win lottery is not displayed. Therefore, even if the big hit is held as the first winning/winning lottery, there is a possibility that a plurality of continuous big hits can be obtained by continuing to hit until the big winning is held as the second winning/winning lottery.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special figure control means 251, a second special figure control means 252, and a general figure control means 254. The first special symbol control unit 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41 according to the variation pattern determined corresponding to the determination result of the first win/loss lottery by the first lottery unit 211. Let The first special symbol control means 251 sets the start condition of the new symbol variation as the fact that the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the first win/loss lottery or the second win/loss lottery made before that is finished. The second special symbol control unit 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42 according to the variation pattern determined corresponding to the determination result of the second win/loss lottery by the second lottery unit 212. Let The second special symbol control means 252 also sets the start condition of a new symbol variation that the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the first win/loss lottery or the second win/loss lottery made before that is finished.

When the special drawing holding means 241 stores the winning/winning lottery value of the second winning/winning lottery, the first special drawing control means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning/winning lottery. On the other hand, the second special figure control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second win/win lottery regardless of whether or not the win/win lottery value of the first win/win lottery is stored by the special figure holding means 241. Thereby, when the lottery value is held in both the first win/win lottery and the second win/win lottery, the lottery value held in the second win/win lottery is preferentially read and the symbol variation is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning/winning lottery is not read and the symbol variation does not start until the number of holdings of the second winning/winning lottery becomes 0.

The first special symbol control unit 251 and the second special symbol control unit 252 vary by the command communication unit 205 described later at the timing of starting and stopping the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 (submain). When transmitting the fluctuation start command, the judgment result determined or determined as the main judgment, the stop symbol, the value indicating each of the fluctuation patterns, and the value indicating which of the first win/loss lottery and the second win/loss lottery It transmits to the effect determination means 303 with a fluctuation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the effect determination means 303 (sub-main) sends a change start command, a change stop command, etc. to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variable display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized and the interlocking is maintained. The universal figure control means 254 displays the determination result of the lottery by the universal figure lottery means 213 on the ordinary symbol display section 45 as a variable display of the ordinary symbol.

<Special figure adjusting means 276>
The special figure adjusting means 276 makes the start of the variable display of the other of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 stand by while the variable display of one is displayed. Special figure adjustment means 276, regardless of the order in which the game ball entered the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12, regardless of the order of the second starting symbol into the second starting port 12 The variable display of 52 is prioritized over the variable display of the first special symbol 51 based on the ball entering the first starting opening 11. For example, when both the first win/win lottery value and the second win/win lottery value are suspended, the second win/win lottery value is always preferentially consumed, and the second special symbol 52 is continuously displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, the special figure adjusting means 276 in the modified example displays the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in accordance with the order of entering the first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12. It may be selectively variably displayed. For example, when the ball is entered in the order of the first starting opening 11, the first starting opening 11, and the second starting opening 12, the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable order. To be done. In this case, the special figure adjustment means 276 monitors the hold control means 240 and stores the hold order of the winning/winning lottery values. Which special symbol should be changed is determined according to the order of entering the game balls, that is, the order of holding the winning/winning lottery values in the hold control means 240, so that the player can easily visually grasp the order of change.

Even if the special figure adjusting means 276 in another modified example displays the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined digestion order regardless of the order of entering the ball. Good. For example, it is possible to give priority to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52. For example, when both the first win/win lottery value and the second win/win lottery value are held, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are alternately displayed in a varying manner. Which special symbol should be changed is simply changed alternately regardless of the order of entering the game balls, so that the player can easily perceive the order of change.

Special figure adjustment means 276, when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a winning manner, makes the other variable display start waiting. In this case, the variable display of the special symbol is not started during the execution of the special game, so that the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Preliminary determination means 235>
The advance determination means 235 includes a first lottery advance determination means 236 and a second lottery advance determination means 237. The first lottery pre-judgment means 236 is various random numbers acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 before execution of various judgments by the first win/loss judgment means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, and the first variation pattern determination means 231. Before using the first special figure control means 251 to start the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the information regarding the fluctuation is determined in advance. The second lottery pre-determination means 237, the various random numbers acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217, before the execution of the various determinations by the second win/loss determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232. Before using the second special symbol control means 252 to start the variation of the second special symbol, the information regarding the variation is determined in advance.

The first lottery pre-determination means 236, as the determination table for the pre-determination related to the first lottery means 211, the first pre-winning lottery value determination table, the first pre-symbol lottery value determination table, the first pre-variation pattern random value determination Hold the table. The first lottery advance determination means 236 determines a random number group to which the first win/loss lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs, using the first advance win/win lottery value determination table. The first lottery advance determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs by using the first advance symbol lottery value determination table. The first lottery advance determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs, using the first advance variation pattern determination table. Then, these determination results are temporarily stored as the preliminary determination results, and the command communication unit 205 (sub-control command transmitting unit 207) described later transmits information regarding the preliminary determination results to the sub-board 300.

FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a prior win/failure determination table that is referred to in the advance win/failure determination. The first lottery pre-judgment means 236 (previous win/no-judgment regarding the first game) refers to the first pre-win/win lottery value judgment table of FIG. Is 0 to 299, the value of "1" indicating that is set as the pre-qualification determination result. When the winning/winning lottery value is “300 to 2999”, the value of “2” indicating that is set as the advance winning/winning determination result. When the winning/winning lottery value is "3000 to 56499", the value of "3" indicating that is set as the advance winning/winning determination result. When the winning/winning lottery value is “56500 to 65535”, the value of “4” indicating that is set as the advance winning/winning determination result. Next, referring to the first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99", a value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. .. When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", the value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "230-255", the value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Further, when the first preliminary variation pattern random value determination table (not shown) is referred to, if the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9," the value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. .. When the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value of "B" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. When the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the advance determination information set by the first lottery advance determination means 236 (the advance winning/non-execution determination regarding the first game) is the first starting opening 11 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmitting means 207) described later. Information indicating that the player has entered the ball (indicating that it is the first win/loss lot), information that indicates the number of holdings, etc. are transmitted to the effect determination means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing.

The second lottery pre-judgment means 237 (pre-judgment regarding the second game) refers to the second pre-winning lottery value judgment table of FIG. 9(b) at the time of entering the second starting opening 12, and wins/wins lottery. When the value is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating that is set as the prior win/failure determination result. When the winning/winning lottery value is “300 to 2999”, the value of “2” indicating that is set as the advance winning/winning determination result. When the winning/winning lottery value is “3000 to 63999”, the value “3” indicating that fact is set as the advance winning/winning determination result. When the winning/winning lottery value is “64000 to 65535”, the value of “4” indicating that is set as the advance winning/winning determination result. Next, with reference to the second preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", a value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. .. When the second symbol lottery value is "145 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", the value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, when the second pattern variation random number value determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9," the value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. .. When the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value of "B" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. When the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the advance determination information set by the second lottery advance determination means 237 (the advance winning/non-execution determination regarding the second game) is the second starting opening 12 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmitting means 207) described later. Information indicating that the player has entered the ball (indicating that it is the second winning/absence lottery), information that indicates the number of holdings, etc. are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing.

The various information temporarily stored as the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination unit 235 is stored in a predetermined preliminary determination result storage area with an upper limit of four as in the case of the number of reserved storages. Note that the preliminary determination result may be stored using the holding storage area stored by the holding control unit 240. The information may be erased based on the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means 235 transmitted to the effect determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. In this way, by sharing with other areas or erasing information based on the completion of transmission, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected. Further, as the determination table for the preliminary determination, a determination table for the main determination may be used without providing a table dedicated to the preliminary determination, and it is possible to perform the prior winning determination regarding the first game and the preliminary determination regarding the second game. Some or all may share a common pre-determination table. In this way, by sharing with other determination tables, it can be expected that the data capacity of the main board 200 can be reduced. Note that the content transmitted as the determination result of the pre-determination unit 235 can be appropriately selected, for example, only the determination result of success or failure is transmitted. In addition, the random number values acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 are transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 described above without being judged by the pre-judgment means 235, and the sub-board The content of the preliminary determination may be determined by 300.

The pre-determination unit 235 may refer to the pre-winning lottery value determination table in which the correspondence relationship between the win-win lottery value and the pre-winning win-win determination result differs depending on the setting value set by the setting change device 170. Similar to the above win/loss determination table, a plurality of types of advance win/loss lottery value determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings may be prepared, and the advance win/loss lottery value determination table to be referred to may be switched according to the setting value of the game setting. In addition, a pre-win/win win lottery value determination table that can be commonly used among a plurality of game settings may be used. In this case, the win/fail may be pre-judged by a combination of the setting value of the game setting and the value of the pre-win/win judgment result.

FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a prior win/failure determination table corresponding to the game setting. This figure (a) is a prior winning/non-judging table referenced by the first lottery preliminary judging means 236, and this figure (b) is a prior winning/non-judging table referenced by the second lottery preliminary judging means 237. When the winning/winning lottery value is “0 to 294”, the advance winning/winning determination result is “11”, which indicates that the jackpot is a big hit in all the settings 1 to 6. When the win/loss lottery value is "295", the advance win/loss determination result is "12", which indicates that the jackpot is a big hit in the setting 2 or more in the normal time or in all the settings in the probability variation. When the win/loss lottery value is "296", the advance win/loss determination result is "13", which indicates that the jackpot is a big hit in the setting of 3 or more in the normal time or all the settings in the probability variation. When the win/loss lottery value is "297", the advance win/loss determination result is "14", which indicates that the jackpot is a big hit in the setting 4 or more in the normal time or in all the settings in the probability variation. When the win/loss lottery value is "298", the advance win/loss determination result is "15", which indicates that the jackpot is a big hit in the setting 5 or more in the normal time or in all the settings in the probability variation. When the win/loss lottery value is "299", the advance win/loss determination result is "16", which indicates that the setting 6 in the normal time or all the settings in the probability variation causes a big hit. Further, when the winning/winning lottery value is “300 to 2949”, the preliminary winning/winning determination result is “21”, which means that the jackpot is a big hit in all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning/winning lottery value is “2950 to 2959”, the preliminary winning/winning determination result is “22”, which indicates that the jackpot is a big hit in the setting 2 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning/winning lottery value is “2960 to 2969”, the preliminary winning/winning determination result is “23”, which means that the jackpot is a big hit when the probability variation is set to 3 or more. When the winning/winning lottery value is “2970 to 2979”, the preliminary winning/winning determination result is “23”, which means that the jackpot is a big hit in the setting 4 or more at the time of probability variation. When the winning/winning lottery value is "2980 to 2989", the prior winning/winning determination result is "25", which indicates that the jackpot is a big hit when the probability is set to 5 or more. When the winning/winning lottery value is “2990 to 2999”, the prior winning/winning determination result is “26”, which means that the setting 6 at the time of probability change is a big hit. Further, when the first win/win lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499" and the second win/win lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the pre-win/win win determination result is " "30", which means a small hit in all settings. Further, when the first win/win lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535" and the second win/win lottery value shown in (b) is "64000 to 65535", the prior win/no win determination result is " 40”, indicating that all settings are out of alignment. By using such a pre-win/win judgment table, it is possible to show an appropriate pre-win/win judgment result for each set value of the game setting.

<Special game control means 260>
Special game control means 260, when the first winning/winning lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in the transition to the special game, the special game operation when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode. It is determined that the conditions are established, and the special winning opening 20 is opened to execute the special game. Similarly, the special game control means 260, when the second winning/winning lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in the transition to the special game, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode. It is determined that the special game operating condition is established, and the special winning opening 20 is opened to execute the special game.

The special game is a game in which the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening 20 is continuously repeated a plurality of times, and is composed of a plurality of unit games. The special games include a 16R jackpot that repeats a unit game 16 times, a 4R jackpot that repeats a unit game 4 times, and a 2R jackpot that repeats a 16R jackpot and a unit game whose opening time is shorter than the 4R jackpot only 2 times. The 16R jackpot is the jackpot in the second win/win lottery, and the 4R jackpot is the jackpot in the first win/win lottery. In the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot, in principle, the special winning opening 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in one unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the special winning opening 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 ends the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is exhausted. Even when the 2R jackpot is achieved, the special winning opening 20 may be opened in the same manner as the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot if the predetermined condition is satisfied.

<Small hit game control means 265>
The small hit game control means 265, when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small hit, the small hit game operation when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small hit manner. It is determined that the conditions have been established, and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the special winning opening 20 to execute the small hit game. Similarly, the small hit game control means 265, when the result of the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 indicates a small hit, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small hit manner, the small hit It is determined that the winning game operating condition is satisfied, and the small winning game is executed by opening the big winning opening 20 in the opening/closing control means 275.

In the small hit game, the unit game is executed once, and the special winning opening 20 is opened and closed twice in the single unit game. The small hit game control means 265 opens the special winning opening 20 for about 1.6 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the special winning opening 20 to end the small hit game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls the normal game in the probability changing state, the time saving state, and the easy entry state. The specific game control means 270, when the special symbol is a specific big hit symbol accompanied by the transition to the probability variation, shifts the game state to the probability variation state, the time saving state, and the easy entry state after the special game ends. The probability changing state, the time saving state, and the easy entry state continue until the next big hit occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 select a variation pattern with a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is generally short. To do. However, in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern table according to the number of holdings of the win/loss lottery value by the holding control unit 240 is referred to, and the smaller the number of holdings by the holding control unit 240, the more easily the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time appears. In the easy-to-enter state, both the normal variation of the symbol and the opening extension of the second starting opening 12 or only the opening extension of the second starting opening 12 is performed. That is, the specific game control means 270 causes the second starting opening 12 to be in the open extension state when a specific big hit occurs, and the winning probability of the open lottery is further increased only when the win/loss lot is the second win/loss lot. The probability change state is higher than the normal probability state. During the probability change state, the probability that the result of hit determination by the first hit determination unit 221 and the second hit determination unit 222 is a big hit is maintained at a high value.

<Opening/closing control means 275>
The opening/closing control unit 275 controls opening/closing of the ordinary electric auditors product 90 and the special winning opening 20 of the second starting opening 12. The opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting opening 12 when the ordinary symbol is stopped in a specific mode. The opening/closing control means 275 opens the second starting opening 12 in the short opening time or the long opening time according to the result of the open lottery in the normal state, and in the long opening time in the easy entry state. 2 Open the starting port 12. The ease of entering the second starting opening 12 is improved so that the player can continue the game without reducing the number of balls he holds. The opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the special winning opening solenoid 92 to open the special winning opening 20 in the special game.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial processing execution means 280 executes control start processing of the main board 200 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when power is restored. The main power interruption process executing means 282 executes a process for dealing with an abnormality such as a power interruption process in the main board 200 when a power abnormality such as a power interruption occurs. The main error detection unit 284 executes an abnormality detection process in the main board 200. The control start processing of the main board 200, the abnormality handling processing, and the abnormality detection processing will be described later.

<Setting change means 286, setting confirmation means 287>
The setting changing means 286 executes a "setting changing process" for changing the game setting. When the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch when the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state, the setting changing means 286 shifts to the above-mentioned setting changing state. The setting changing unit 286 displays the set value stored in the setting memory on the setting display unit 173 when the setting is changed. The setting changing unit 286 sequentially changes the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 173 in response to the pressing of the setting change button 172, such as 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→.... The setting value stored in the setting memory is updated to the same value as the display on the setting display unit 173. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting changing unit 286 ends the setting changing state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The setting confirmation means 287 executes "setting confirmation processing" for confirming the game setting. When the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch when the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state, the setting confirmation means 287 shifts to the above-mentioned setting confirmation state. The setting confirming unit 287 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory when the setting confirmation state is entered. Unlike the setting changing unit 286 described above, the setting confirmation unit 287 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 even when the setting change button 172 is pressed, and updates the setting value stored in the setting memory. do not do. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation unit 287 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

Note that the setting value data managed by the setting memory is not limited to the numerical values of "1" to "6", but numerical values of "0" to "5" may be used instead. In this case, the setting value “0” corresponds to the setting 1, the setting value “1” corresponds to the setting 2, the setting value “2” corresponds to the setting 3, and the setting value “3” corresponds to the setting 4. The setting value “4” may correspond to the setting 5, and the setting value “5” may correspond to the setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, when the RAM is abnormal, the RAM clear process is performed and the set value data is set to the initial value "0". Can be simplified. Further, when performing some sort of lottery using the set value data, for example, when different tables or data are selected for each set value in the prefetching process, there is an advantage that the offset process for the selection can be simplified. . For example, when "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, when these values are used as they are as the offset data for the table or data selection, additional processing such as -1 is added to the start address is required. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the setting value data, the numerical value of the setting value data can be used as it is as the offset data. When using the numerical values of “0” to “5” as the setting value data, the setting changing unit 286 and the setting confirmation unit 287 may display the numerical value of the setting value data as it is on the setting display unit 173, or the setting may be performed. A numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the value data may be displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the latter case, the numerical data of "0" to "5" is converted into the numerical values of setting 1 to setting 6 in the game setting and displayed, so that the display can be made easy for the manager of the gaming machine to understand.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication unit 205 sends a payout control command communication unit 206 that sends a control command necessary for execution of payout and the like to the payout control board 155, and a sub control that sends control command necessary for execution of effect control and the like to the sub board 300. The command transmission means 207 is included. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command for instructing the payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening based on the determination of the entrance into each winning opening by the entering determination means 201, and the main board 200. Send a command that indicates the status of the error that occurred in. When starting the symbol variation, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the lottery determination result corresponding to the symbol variation to the effect determining means 303 together with the symbol variation control command.

The sub-control command transmission means 207 changes at the timing when the first special symbol control device 251 and the second special symbol control device 252 start and stop the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 (submain). When transmitting the fluctuation start command, the judgment result determined or determined as the main judgment, the stop symbol, the value indicating each of the fluctuation patterns, and the value indicating which of the first win/loss lottery and the second win/loss lottery It transmits to the effect determination means 303 with a fluctuation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the effect determination means 303 (sub-main) sends a change start command, a change stop command, etc. to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variable display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized and the interlocking is maintained. In addition, the sub-control command transmitting unit 207 transmits the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination unit 235 to the effect determining unit 303. After the preliminary determination result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, the winning opening corresponding to the preliminary determination result (the first starting opening 11, the second starting) regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the lottery is immediately started. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the type information of the mouth 12), the information on the number of holdings, the game state, etc., and is erased from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, for the sub-board 300 side, the so-called “look-ahead” process is realized in which the result of prior determination can be presumably recognized in advance based on the received preliminary determination result before the turn of symbol variation starts. Note that the processing based on the preliminary determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. The sub-control command transmission means 207 is set by the special game control means 260 information about the special game, the small hit game control means 265 information about the small hit game, the general drawing lottery means 213 drawing result information, and the setting change means 286. The setting value information of the game setting is transmitted to the sub-board 300. Further, the sub-control command transmission unit 207 is transmitted to the main substrate 200 or various controls on the main substrate 200, such as information regarding the initial processing by the main initial processing execution unit 280 and the main error detection unit 284 and information regarding errors. Information relating to various signals and the like is appropriately transmitted to the sub-board 300.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub-board 300 includes a pattern mode determination means 301, a pattern storage means 302, a performance determination means 303, a performance control means 304, a timing means 307, a performance setting means 308, a sub initial processing execution means 360, a sub power interruption processing execution means 362, The sub-error detection unit 364, the command reception unit 370, and the sub-side pre-determination unit 371 are provided.

The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of effect patterns in which the effect image content to be displayed on the effect display device 60 and the display process thereof are determined when the decorative pattern 61 changes. In the production pattern, a plurality of variation production patterns in which the variation process and the production process from the variation start to the stop in the variation display of the decorative design 61 are defined, and the variation display of the decorative design are displayed separately and the degree of expectation to the big hit. A plurality of notice effect patterns for suggesting the height of the notice prior to the stop of the variable display are included.

The command receiving unit 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication unit 205, and the sub-side pre-determination unit 371 holds the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication unit 205. The effect determination means 303 includes a normal effect determination means 373 and a prefetch effect determination means 374. The normal effect determination means 373 causes the effect control means 304 to display the effect display device 60 on the effect display device 60 according to the information of the determination result of the first win/win lottery or the determination result of the second win/win lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the speaker. 108, the effect contents to be output to the decoration lamp 111 and the like are determined. The effect determination means 303 determines effect contents according to the set value of the game setting transmitted from the command communication means 205. The pre-reading effect determination unit 374 determines the effect contents to be displayed on the effect display device 60 by the effect control unit 304 and output to the speaker 108, the decoration lamp 111, etc., according to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication unit 205. .. The normal effect determination means 373 is determined by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232, and among the plurality of variation effect patterns corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol transmitted from the command communication means 205. One of them is selected and read from the pattern storage means 302. The normal effect determination means 373 sends the read information of the variable effect pattern to the effect control means 304. The normal effect determination means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable effect pattern. It should be noted that the variation effect pattern may be determined by the normal effect determination means 373 with reference to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the variable effect pattern may be changed together with the content of the prefetch effect by the prefetch effect determination means 374. The effect pattern may be determined in some cases. The pre-reading effect determination unit 374 more accurately specifies the result of the main determination based on the preliminary determination result from the command communication unit 205, the previous preliminary determination result held in the sub-board 300, the game state information, and the like, and the determination is performed. Based on the result, whether or not the prefetching effect is executed before the main determination and the execution content thereof are determined. Specifically, the prefetch effect determination means 374 determines whether or not the current game state is the probability variation game, and then shifts to the normal game state based on the pre-determination result prior to the pre-determination result received this time. It is determined whether to do. Based on the result of the determination, the result of the final determination related to the pre-determined result received this time, the variation pattern to be selected, and the like are specified, and whether or not to execute the prefetching effect and the content of execution of the prefetching effect are determined based on the specification result. . Since the effect determining means 303 has many parts in which the normal effect determining means 373 and the prefetching effect determining means 374 cooperate with each other, the effect determining means 303 will be described as the effect determining means 303 including both of them, except for particularly necessary parts.

In each variation effect pattern, a variation time is defined for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and when the variation time elapses, the symbol variation is stopped. The effect determination means 303 selects the variable effect pattern of the effect image having the same variable time according to the variable pattern of the special symbol.

The symbol mode determination means 301, the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol 61 and its arrangement, the determination result of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol, the decoration It is determined according to the variation effect pattern of the symbol. The symbol mode determination means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of stop symbols to the effect control means 304. The symbol mode determination means 301 holds a symbol range table to be referred to in order to determine a stop symbol of a decorative symbol.

The stop symbol of the decorative symbol 61 is formed as a combination of three symbols, for example, when the result of the hit determination by the first hit determination means 221 and the second hit determination means 222 indicates a transition to a special game of 4R big hit or 16R big hit. A specific combination, for example, a combination having three symbols such as “777” or “111” is selected. Also in the case of the 2R big hit or the small hit, the specific combination, for example, a predetermined combination such as "357" is selected, but the specific combination is not necessarily a combination of three symbols. You don't have to. If the result of the judgment is neither a big hit nor a small hit, it is a combination such as "312" or "946" that does not have three symbols, and it is a specific combination selected when a 2R big hit or a small hit. A combination that does not apply is selected. If the result of the hit determination is not a 4R big hit or a 16R big hit, and if a variation pattern showing a reach out is selected, only one symbol such as "191" or "727" is not a combination. Select.

In the variable effect pattern of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, the effect process from the change start to the change stop of the decorative pattern is defined. In the variation effect pattern, a pattern when displaying a normal out-of-drawing pattern, a pattern when displaying an out-of-going pattern after a reach state where one more pattern is aligned, and a big-hit pattern after reaching The pattern when doing is included. In particular, the patterns that go through the reach state include patterns having various long and short fluctuation times. In each variation effect pattern, a variation time is defined for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and when the variation time elapses, the symbol variation is stopped. The effect determination means 303 selects the variable effect pattern of the decorative symbol whose variable time is the same as that of the special symbol according to the variable pattern of the special symbol.

In the time saving state, when the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determining unit 231 or the second variation pattern determining unit 232 is a time saving pattern, the effect determining unit 303 changes the effect content for time saving. Select a performance pattern. The time-saving effect content is an effect in which a background image or a sound that gives an impression that the player is in an advantageous state due to the time saving or the probability change is output.

The notice production pattern is a production pattern for temporarily displaying on the screen an image, animation, video, etc. of a specific character or motif, a production pattern for operating an accessory, and a production pattern for outputting a specific voice. The production by the notice production pattern is executed in parallel with the symbol variation, and suggests in advance that the symbol variation is highly likely to stop in the big hit mode. For example, there are a normal notice effect in which only one character image is displayed on the screen, and a group notice effect in which a group of many characters is displayed so as to pass from one end to the other end of the screen. Further, a step-up notice effect is further included in which the display process of the notice effect is divided into a plurality of stages, and the number of stages to be displayed is made variable so that the greater the number of stages, the higher the expectation for a big hit.

In the notice production pattern, the production is executed at a timing after the display state of the decorative design 61 is in the reach state, and the final design of the design is announced in advance (post-reach notice), and the decorative design 61 is one. There is also a pattern (preliminary notice before reach) that gives a notice at the same time that the production is executed at a timing when it is not stopped and becomes a reach state.

The effect determination means 303 should determine whether or not to display the notice effect on the effect display device 60 by a predetermined notice lottery in accordance with the determination result of the winning/disapproval lottery or the result of the advance determination, and set and display the advance effect. The notice production pattern is determined. The effect determination unit 303 holds a notification determination table to be referred to in order to determine whether or not to display the notification effect, and a notification type table to be referred to when selecting the type of the notification effect pattern. The advance notice determination table is set so that different columns are referred to according to the judgment result or the preliminary judgment result of the win/loss lottery, and when the win/win lottery is a win, the advance notice effect is displayed with a higher probability than when it is out. As described above, the correspondence relationship between the determination result of the win/no win lot and whether or not to display the notice effect is determined. Thus, the high noticeability of the big hit can be suggested by displaying the notice production itself.

The effect control unit 304 variably displays the effect image including the decorative pattern 61 on the effect display device 60 in accordance with the selected variable effect pattern data. The production control means 304 sets the reception condition of the variation start command of the decorative pattern 61 as the start condition of the variable display of the new decorative symbol. When the effect determination means 303 determines that the notice effect is to be displayed, the effect control unit 304 displays the notice effect according to the selected notice effect pattern on the effect display device 60 in the form of being superimposed on the effect of the symbol variation. Let

If the win/win lottery value of the second win/win lottery is stored, the effect control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first win/win lottery, and the win/win lottery value of the first win/win lottery is stored. Regardless of whether or not it starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning/winning lottery. As a result, when the lottery values are held for both the first win/win lottery and the second win/win lottery, the lottery values held in the second win/win lottery are preferentially read out and the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. .. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first win/win lottery is not read and the variation of the decorative symbol does not start until the number held in the second win/win lottery becomes 0. In this way, the effect control unit 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display the symbol variation effect including the variable display of the decorative symbol 61.

The effect control unit 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66. The effect control means 304 has effect display control means 305, voice control means 306, and lamp control means 309. The effect display control means 305 controls the display on the effect display device 60, and the voice control means 306 controls the audio output from the speaker 108. The lamp control means 309 controls lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111.

During the change of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, it is necessary to display an image indicating that the symbol is changing on the effect display device 60. Normally, the normal size decorative pattern 61 having a certain size is variably displayed, but in a mode that hinders the visibility of the variable display of the normal size decorative pattern 61, the main effect contents other than the variation of the decorative pattern 61 are displayed. You may display a special effect to be performed. In this case, the player is informed that the pattern is changing by variably displaying the alternative pattern, which is a decorative pattern smaller than the normal size decorative pattern. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative design, it means a normal-sized decorative design, but when distinguishing from an alternative design, the normal-sized decorative design is also referred to as a “normal decorative design” or a “main decorative design”.

The alternative design is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative design is hindered, for example, while the normal decorative design is hidden. The alternative design is a form of a decorative design for suggesting the result of winning/defective judgment, and has a simplified display form (in other words, simplification, simplification) than the normal decorative design, and the normal decorative design. It is displayed in a variation process that is simpler than that. The alternative design has a display form on the appearance corresponding to the portion showing the design type of the normal decorative design, and has, for example, a display form showing numbers, characters, and symbols indicating the design type. Further, the alternative design is variably displayed in an area narrower than the area in which the decorative design is normally variably displayed, and typically at a position where it is difficult to hinder the main effect due to elements other than the design, for example, in a corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. Variable display. The alternative design is usually displayed relatively smaller than the decorative design, but has a display form in which at least the design type can be visually identified. The alternative design may be a reduction of the normal decorative design, or may be the same as the normal decorative design except for the size.

The plurality of alternative symbols displayed in place of the plurality of normal decorative symbols suggests a high degree of expectation that the result of the winning/winning lottery will be in a state advantageous to the player due to a combination of stop modes at the end of fluctuation. For example, a plurality of alternative symbols suggests that two of the three alternative symbols are in a reach state in which the symbol types are aligned, and thus the expectation of a big hit in the variation is high. In addition, the right and left symbols that are in the reach state become a particular type of symbol that suggests that the degree of expectation such as "3" or "7" is relatively high, and the degree of expectation such as "1" or "2" By becoming a type of pattern that suggests that it is relatively low, it may indicate a high or low degree of expectation of the reach state. In addition, the alternative design does not have a definite stop state in appearance, but becomes a temporary stop state in which a slight shake is maintained. After the temporary stop of the alternative symbol, the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in place of the alternative symbol, and the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in a fixed stop state. Further, instead of exclusively displaying the normal decorative design and the alternative design, the display periods may overlap. Furthermore, at the time of a predetermined effect in which the visibility of the normal decorative design is impaired, the variable display of the normal decorative design may be continued and the variation of the alternative design may be displayed. Unlike the alternative symbol, in the predetermined area of the effect display device 60 during the change of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, the special symbol is changing in the same or smaller image as the alternative symbol. You may change and display the simple symbol which suggests that there is. The simple symbol may be configured by a variable display of three symbol combinations like the normal decorative symbol, may be configured by a variable display of one symbol, or may be a simple symbol (such as “○” or “×”). May be sequentially switched. The simple design is not related to the variable display mode of the normal decorative pattern or the alternative pattern, and displays a certain variation from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the end of the variation. May be displayed. In addition, the simple symbol may be changed at any time as long as the suggestion that the special symbol is being variably displayed and the result of the special symbol are at least informed. Further, the simple design may be called “sub-decorative design”, “sub-design”, “mini-decorative design”, “mini-design”, or the like. In addition to the effect display device 60, a variable display of a decorative design called a fourth design that shows a display equivalent to a simple design by a light emitting mode such as an LED may be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display during change of special symbol, result display) when a problem occurs in the effect display device 60. As an example of the display mode of the 4th pattern, the LEDs are sequentially turned on (white, green, blue, yellow, orange, red) (can be blinking including turning off). Therefore, the variable display may be displayed, or the flashing may be indicated by flashing in a single color depending on the type of the special symbol, and the emission color when the stop display is performed may indicate the type of deviation or big hit.

The time measuring means 307 is a time measuring circuit that outputs time information used in the game. The time counting means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time from when the power is turned on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit that has a built-in battery and can continue to measure the date and time by the battery even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off or a power failure occurs. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there may be a slight difference in the time for each gaming machine due to individual differences or time lags, whereas in the case of a timer circuit, the time difference between multiple gaming machines may be different as long as the power is turned on at the same time. Is unlikely to occur.

The effect determination means 303 executes the synchronized effect starting at a predetermined timing triggered by the fact that the time information output by the timing means 307 indicates a predetermined time. The synchronization effect is an effect to be displayed on the effect display device 60 in a synchronization effect period which is a period substantially asynchronous with the variation period of the symbol variation and the game state. The synchronization effect period extends for several minutes, and its length is longer than the symbol variation time for one time, and may include a plurality of symbol variation periods. The effect pattern of the synchronized effect is stored in the pattern storage unit 302, and reproduction of a predetermined music and video is defined in the effect pattern. A plurality of types of effect patterns for synchronization effects are prepared, and different types of effect patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as month, date, day of the week, and time.

The synchronization effect is executed regardless of whether the game is a normal game or a special game. Here, "during a normal game" includes the display of a so-called standby demo screen. That is, "during normal game", (1) "variable display normal game" in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, (2) "variation stopped normal game" in which the symbols are not displayed in a floating state and not displayed in the standby demo screen "(3) "Standby demo screen displaying normal game", which is displaying the standby demo screen instead of the variable display of symbols, is included. The tuning effect can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the cases (2) and (3), the output mode for controlling volume reduction and brightness reduction in the tuning effect is (1). Can be different than. Also, while the standby demo screen is displayed, information about the mobile cooperation system described later can be input by the player's operation of the effect button 109 or the cross key 110, and when the operation input is made, the image and sound of the synchronization effect are output. It is suppressed, and screen display such as performance customization by the mobile cooperation system is given priority.

The entrainment effect is an effect in which, for example, a performance of a predetermined music piece or an image is reproduced at a predetermined time (referred to as "entrainment effect start time"). The time that triggers the reproduction of the synchronization effect may be a time that the pachinko game machine 100 arrives at a predetermined time interval after the power is turned on, or every hour on the hour or half hour based on the standard time. May be Alternatively, a time that may be different depending on the date or the day of the week may be set, and the interval may be different, such as first one hour later, then three hours later, instead of a fixed interval such as “every hour”. The interval may vary depending on the date and the day of the week. It may be a variable setting in which the time can be specified by the game shop staff for each game shop. However, it is set in advance so that the same synchronization effect is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of the same models installed in the same game shop. For example, in the case of a specification that is triggered by the arrival time with a predetermined time interval after the power is turned on, a plurality of machines are turned on at the same time in the game store. As a result, the same synchronization effect is simultaneously executed on the plurality of gaming machines when the predetermined time is reached. As a result, the effects are displayed at the same time as if they were synchronized by multiple units, and the same song or video is played at the same time. A staging effect can be obtained.

The function of the synchronization production is also built in another game machine of the same model, and a plurality of game machines on the same game island are simultaneously powered on by a game shop staff every day. Then, all of the plurality of gaming machines that are powered on at the same time arrive at the synchronized effect start time almost at the same time, and the synchronized effect can be simultaneously executed at the same time. This is called a multi-unit synchronization effect. In that case, not only the video display will be synchronized with multiple units, but also the output of sound effects and background music will be synchronized with multiple units. Increase.

The effect setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes a history of game results and a history of effect results. The history of the game results is a result of the game such as the number of hit balls, the number of prize balls, the number of big hits, the number of probability changes, and the number of time reductions, which is a result of the game and which leads to a payout obtained by the player. The production result history is different from the game profit, and is recorded in order to obtain profits such as the right to change the content and type of the production, and the right to facilitate the appearance of a specific type of production. It is information such as the score of. For example, in order to score the number of appearances of a predetermined effect, the result of a mini game, and the like and give the score to the player, the coded information indicating the score and the game history, for example, a two-dimensional code is displayed on the screen. When the player reads the two-dimensional code with the camera of his mobile terminal and decodes it, the score and the information of the game history obtained by the decoding are accumulated in the mobile terminal of the player. The cooperation system between the game machine and the player's mobile terminal via the two-dimensional code will be described later. In addition, the score mentioned here is necessary in order to expand the range of production customization described later, and the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.). It is a specification that increases the number of customizable items.

The effect setting means 308 stores a setting for selecting which of a plurality of kinds of effect content options is selected as effect customization based on the player's selection instruction and the game history. For example, as the effect patterns to be displayed during the special game, a plurality of kinds of effect patterns having different motifs, characters, and music to be displayed are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is allowed to select which effect is to be displayed. I will. Alternatively, it is assumed that a plurality of types of motifs or character designs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302 as the design of the design included in the decorative design to be varied, and the player is allowed to select which design to display. In these cases, when the player operates the production button 109 or the cross key 110 while the standby demo screen is displayed and the production pattern is selected through the operation, the production setting unit 308 displays the selected content. Remember. The effect determination means 303 selects the type of effect pattern during the special game in accordance with the setting stored by the effect setting means 308.

The sub initial process execution means 360 executes the control start process of the sub substrate 300 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is restored. The sub-power interruption process executing means 362 executes a process for dealing with an abnormality such as a power-off process in the sub-board 300 when a power abnormality such as a power-off occurs. The sub-error detection unit 364 executes an abnormality detection process on the sub-board 300. When the sub error detection means 364 detects the power failure, the sub power interruption process execution means 362 backs up the RAM data in the backup RAM as the power interruption processing.

FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an outline of the mobile cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperation system, the player performs user registration in advance by setting an account and a password on the game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site on the mobile terminal 354. When the player presses the effect button 109 at the start of the game, the effect display control means 305 causes the screen of the effect display device 60 to display the two-dimensional code 350 that encodes the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358. The player is made to read it by the camera of the mobile terminal and is made to access the exclusive site of the game history server 358. Character information (also referred to as "password information") obtained by encoding player identification information and performance score history is transmitted from the dedicated site to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control unit 305 causes the effect display device 60 to display the input screen of the password information, and allows the player to input the password information through a button operation such as the cross key 110. The entered password information is decrypted by the effect setting means 308 and registered as the player's identification information and effect score history, so that the player's previous game contents and effect score state can be taken over. The input of the password information serves as an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start effect customization for selecting various effect elements. Thereafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, along with the progress of the game and the production, the points that the production setting means 308 gives to the player as a production profit are added up at any time to be accumulated as the production score history, and the player is also accumulated. At any time, it is possible to perform effect customization and select and set favorite elements as various effect elements. The score on the production is basically added for each symbol variation, and a higher score is given to a production type having a higher degree of expectation of transition to the special game, and a higher score is given when the game is shifted to the special game.

As the production customization, the player uses a part of the cumulatively acquired points, and colors, backgrounds, shapes, characters, etc., which constitute the production content displayed on the production display device 60, according to the number of points used. It is possible to change the production elements such as music pieces to a desired type. The effect setting unit 308 receives an instruction to change the effect element through a button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements according to the instruction. As for the production elements that can be customized, a plurality of types of items are prepared for each element, and different values are set as the required points for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of customizable items is increased, or a chance to increase the number of customizable items is given. When the player operates a button as an instruction to end the game or effect customization, the effect setting unit 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as benefits on effect and effect score history, and effects display control. The means 305 displays it on the effect display device 60. The player can read the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his or her own mobile terminal and decode the read two-dimensional code 352 to acquire information and store it in the mobile terminal 354. Further, the information is transmitted from the portable terminal 354 to the game history server 358 having a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with its own account information. In this way, information such as a privilege on the performance and a performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via a transmission means for displaying and reading the two-dimensional code 350, and managed by the game history server 358. You can take over the contents of the game and production at the next game. In addition, by continuing the game for a long time, the number of symbol variations and the number of effects increases, so that points can be obtained.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub-board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291, a main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling all game operations. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). The main CPU 290 acquires a ball input signal from each ball entrance, a payout signal from the payout control board 155, and the like through various interfaces not shown. The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as the winning opening solenoids, the first special symbol display portion 41, and the second special symbol display portion 42 by various drive circuits (not shown). Further, from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300, a command necessary for effect control is transmitted together with information such as the result of the winning/nothing lottery, the result of the symbol determination, the result of the variation pattern determination, and the like. A signal is transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 by one-way communication.

The instruction data to be transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a 2-byte structure that is a combination of 1-byte instruction type data, which is so-called MODE data, and 1-byte instruction content data, which is so-called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by associating the command type data and the command content data with each other and transmitting them to the sub-board 300. The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the type of instruction, and a unique type code is assigned to each instruction type in advance at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of the instruction type data and the instruction content data is an identification bit indicating whether it is the instruction type data or the instruction content data. When the most significant bit is 1, it indicates the instruction type data. When the bit is 0, it indicates that it is the instruction content data.

Since the communication from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 is such that 1 byte of data is transmitted per data transmission, it is necessary to transmit 1 byte twice for transmitting 2 bytes of instruction data. . MODE data, which is the upper byte, is transmitted in the first communication, and EVENT data, which is the lower byte, is transmitted in the second communication. In consideration of the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise or the like, the main board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the same data is read by the sub-board 300 for two consecutive times, the completion of transmission/reception of the data is confirmed. . The main board 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read in two consecutive times, and transmits the data up to five times.

The sub board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub CPU 310, a sub RAM 311, a sub ROM 312, and an effect control device 313. The sub ROM 312 is one of data storage means for holding a sub control program including effect pattern data in which a performance process is defined, display pattern data in which a performance display process is defined, and the like. A sub control program including effect pattern data, display pattern data, and voice pattern data is read from the sub ROM 312 into the sub RAM 311, and effect control by the sub control program is executed by the sub CPU 310. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). A signal from an external device such as the effect button 109 is acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces not shown. The sub CPU 310 drives an external device such as the effect display device 60, the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the movable accessory 66 by the effect control device 313, various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and outputs the display. , Voice output, lighting of lamps, control of effects by action of accessory products. Sub CPU310 transmits the display pattern data and the sound pattern data to effect control device 313. In addition, although an example in which the sub-board 300 includes the effect control device 313 is described in the present embodiment, the sub-board 300 and the effect control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a board, and are separated and connected to each other. May be formed as a separate substrate.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313. The effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, a display control circuit 326, and a voice control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means for holding material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display, and audio data used for audio output in a data compressed state. The effect image data is an image used for variable display and effect display as an effect object showing the result of determination of win/loss, etc. It is a material image such as a moving image to be used. The motion data is data that defines motions for adding a motional motion to an image used for various performances at a predetermined timing. The voice data is voice data such as a music piece, a background sound, a sound effect, and a dialogue of a character that is output during the performance.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, effect image data and motion data designated by the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and effect display using the effect image data and motion data is performed. Is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, the control CPU 320 transmits a command regarding effect display, effect image data, and motion data to the display control circuit 326, and the display control circuit 326 performs display control. Similarly, the control CPU 320 transmits a voice output command and voice data to the voice control circuit 314, and the voice control circuit 314 controls the voice output.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, which are connected to each other via a bus 330. For convenience sake, the bus 330 in this figure is a comprehensive representation of buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

The effect image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and the compressed data among these data is decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is used as a work area when the effect image data or motion data is decoded by the decoder 332, or as a work area when the drawing process or the image process is executed by the drawing circuit 336 (VideoRAM). ).

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute the commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate a display image, and uses the generated display image as a frame of a moving image in a frame buffer. 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM as a buffer memory that temporarily stores the frames of the moving image to be output to the effect display device 60.

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of video signals in the order in which they are stored. The frame buffer 338 has a memory area for two frames, for example, and while the display circuit 340 outputs the display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image, It is stored in the memory area for another frame.

The data ROM 324 holds “detailed display pattern data” in which the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 is defined. At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be referred to as “outline display pattern data” in which an outline of the effect display process is defined. For example, the rough display pattern data defines a rough flow of a series of effect display processes, such as a variation start and variation stop timing of a decorative pattern, a reproduction order of a plurality of moving images, and a reproduction start and stop timing. . On the other hand, in the detailed display pattern data, detailed display control such as the display order of sprite images for realizing variable display of decorative patterns and the display processing order for each frame for displaying moving images based on motion data The process is defined.

When performing the display control based on the “schematic display pattern data” sent from the sub CPU 310, the production control device 313 reads “detailed display pattern data” necessary for the processing from the data ROM 324 and uses both display pattern data. Display processing. Therefore, it can be said that the production control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display pattern data including the “schematic display pattern data” and the “detailed display pattern data”. Therefore, in this specification, unless explicitly stated, the “schematic display pattern data” stored in the sub ROM 312 and the “detailed display pattern data” stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished from each other and simply referred to as “display pattern data”. ". For example, when the effect control means performs a specific process based on the display pattern data held in the data storage means, this display pattern data includes "general display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". .. In the modified example, the display pattern data is not divided into the “schematic display pattern data” and the “detailed display pattern data”, and the display pattern data that serves as both may be held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324. Good.

In this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326. In a modification, the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, the data ROM 324, and the display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. In addition, the processing executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the effect control device 313 may execute the processing executed by the decoder 332, the drawing circuit 336, and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also have the functions of the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338. In addition, the effect control device 313 may have a hardware configuration in which the display control circuit 326 is not included. In this case, the process executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. May be done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300, in addition to the sub-CPU 310, the sub-RAM 311 and the sub-ROM 312, the production control device 313 is included. In a modification, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, the ROM 312, and the effect control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing that is supposed to be executed by the effect control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the process of the control CPU 320, the sub RAM 311 may have the function of the control RAM 322, and the sub ROM 312 may have the function of the data ROM 324. In addition, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration in which the effect control device 313 is not included. In this case, the process executed by the effect control device 313 is executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. You may.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the control start processing of the main board 200 in the pachinko game machine. This control start processing is executed by the main initial processing execution means 280, but hereinafter, it will be described as being executed by the main CPU 290 functioning as the main initial processing execution means 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets a stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial settings related to hardware such as setting internal registers of the main CPU 290. Yes (S104).

The main CPU 290 confirms the operation state of the setting key, and if the setting key is in the ON state (Y of S105), confirms the operation state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S122), the setting change process is executed (S124). On the other hand, if the RAM clear is OFF (N in S122), the setting confirmation process is executed (S126). In S105, if the setting key is in the OFF state (N of S105), the processes of S122 to S126 are skipped.

Then, depending on the operation state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power-off information flag, and the state of the data stored in the main RAM 291, the power-off recovery process or the initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power-off information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the process at power-off recovery is executed. To do. In other cases, that is, when the RAM clear switch is turned on, or when the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power-off information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, the initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed.

The main CPU 290 confirms the operation state of the RAM clear switch, and when the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). When the RAM clear switch is not turned on (N in S106), the main CPU 290 confirms the value of the power-off information flag (S108). If the value of the power-off information flag does not match the power-off normal data (N of S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power-off information flag matches the power-off normal data (Y of S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is inspected (S110). As will be described later, if the processing is normally completed at the previous power failure, the check sum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291, so the main CPU 290 uses the check sum. The data in the main RAM 291 is inspected. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), the data in the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), a process for returning to the state before the power-off is executed (S114).

In the power-off recovery processing (S114), power-on normal data indicating that power-on has been normally performed is stored in the power-off information flag, and various error initialization and communication initial setting with the payout control board 155 are executed. To do. Subsequently, the command request for the untransmitted portion before the power is turned off is cleared, and the command transmission of various information indicating the gaming state is requested. Subsequently, the effect command corresponding to the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open/closed state of the second starting opening 12 and the special winning opening 20 is returned to the state before the power is turned off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the probability varying function of the special symbol is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared to 0, and the initialization of the main RAM 291 and the effect display are executed. In the initialization process of S116, the setting values stored in the setting memory of the setting changing device 170 are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting changing process of S124 are retained as they are.

When the power-off recovery process (S114) or the RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to activate the interrupt process described later, and the operation of the interrupt timer is started (S118). As a result, thereafter, a timer interrupt is generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt process described later is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes main processing for managing the gaming machine (S120).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When using "1" to "6" as the setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when using "0" to "5" as the setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the set memory value is normal (Y of S132), the process of S134 is skipped. Subsequently, the state is changed to the setting change state (S136), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S138). If there is a change operation by the setting change button 172 (Y of S140), the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is updated and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N of S140), the process of S142 will be skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N of S144), the processes of S138 to S142 are repeated. When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the original state and turned off (Y in S144), the setting display unit 173 is hidden so that the set value cannot be visually recognized (S146), and the process returns.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation processing of S126 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S152), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the set memory value is normal (Y of S152), the process of S154 is skipped. The process proceeds to the setting confirmation state (S156), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N in S160), the process of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the set value, and if the setting key is OFF (Y in S160), the setting display portion 173 is hidden. Then, the set value is made invisible (S162), and the process returns.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 temporarily prohibits the timer interrupt (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors the power interruption (S204). When a power supply voltage monitor circuit (not shown) detects a decrease in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158, the power supply voltage monitor circuit inputs an unconditional interrupt request signal to the main CPU 290 to execute power-off storage. In the process, the power cut confirmation data is stored in the power cut confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and when the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y of S206), executes the process for power-off. Therefore, the process proceeds to S212. When the value of the power-off confirmation flag does not match the power-off confirmation data (N of S206), in order to update the normal random number per symbol, the special random number per special symbol, and the soft initial random number per special symbol, The initial value random number updating process is executed (S208), the timer interrupt is permitted (S210), and the process returns to S200. After that, S200 to S210 are repeated. If the timer interrupt occurs while the timer interrupt is prohibited (S202 to S208), the interrupt process described below is executed after the timer interrupt is permitted in S210.

When the power failure is detected in S206 (Y of S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and confirms the content of the power failure information flag (S214). When the content of the power-off information flag does not match the power-on normal data (N of S214), it is determined that the data at power-on is not normally saved, and the power-off abnormal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216), the process proceeds to S222. When the content of the power-off information flag matches the power-on normal data (Y of S214), it is determined that the data at power-on is normally saved, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S218). Next, at the next power-on, in order to inspect the backed up data in the main RAM 291, a checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Subsequently, the access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and the process loops until the power is turned off. It should be noted that the above power-off processing is executed by the main power-off processing executing means 282 realized by the main CPU 290.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of the interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt process. First, the interrupt operation condition is set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Subsequently, in order to manage the gaming machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312). , Second starting opening effective period setting process (S314), winning award monitoring process (S316), award ball control process (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol variation start Monitoring process (S324), starting port monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric auditors product control process (S330), special winning opening effective period setting process (S332), special symbol variation start monitoring control Processing (S334), abnormality detection processing (S336), entry time abnormality detection processing (S338), game status display processing (S340), steering wheel status signal inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), firing control signal The output process (S346), the test signal output process (S348), the solenoid output process (S350), the effect control command transmission process (S352), and the external information output process (S354) are sequentially executed, and the next timer interrupt is permitted. (S356), the process returns.

In the input processing (S304), the input port data of the switch attached to the game board surface, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the door/frame opening signal, the magnetic detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the touch state signal are monitored. , Data indicating the input state is created and stored in the main RAM 291. The data indicating this input state is level data (data of the input port at the time of this interrupt) and rising or falling data (data of the input port at the time of this interrupt and at the time of the previous interrupt). It is the data indicating the switch that has been switched by comparing the data of the input ports by exclusive OR.

In various random number update processing (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. Normally, the random symbol variation pattern is read from the main RAM 291, and the value is incremented and stored when the value is less than the predetermined maximum value, and 0 is stored when the value is equal to or larger than the predetermined maximum value. Further, when the random number of the variation pattern is read from the main RAM 291, and the result of subtracting the predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, the subtraction result is stored, and when it is less than 0, the predetermined maximum value is stored. Thereby, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number updating process (S308), the normal random number per symbol, the special symbol per symbol random number, and the special symbol per soft random number are updated. Each random number value, maximum value, and initial value are read from the main RAM 291, and the random number value is incremented. When the incremented result exceeds the maximum value, the value of the random number is set to 0. When the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the initial value is updated. As a result, the normal random number per symbol, the special symbol per symbol random number, and the special symbol per soft random number are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs, and when the value of the random number returns to the initial value, that is, the range of the random number is cycled. Then, the initial value is newly set and a random number is generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the normal value per random number initial value random number, the special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and the special symbol per software initial value random number are updated. The initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table of the main RAM 291 and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. When the result of the increment exceeds the upper limit value, the value of the initial value random number is set to 0. Similar processing is executed also in the initial value random number updating processing (S208) in the main processing (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of the timers for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the respective tables, and when the timer value is other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. When the value of the timer is 0, the timer is not updated.

In the second starting port effective period setting process (S314), the effective period of the second starting port 12 is set. In the second starting opening 12, the payout of the prize balls and the lottery related to the second special symbol are executed by entering the game balls, and even if the game balls enter, the payout of the prize balls and the second special An invalid period is set in which the lottery related to the symbol is not executed. As will be described later, in the starting opening monitoring control processing (S326), since the monitoring processing of the second starting opening winning is not executed during the invalid period of the second starting opening 12, the game ball enters the second starting opening 12. Even if the prize balls are paid out and the lottery relating to the second special symbol is not executed. The same applies when the valid period and the invalid period are set for the first starting opening 11, the special winning opening 20, the first operating opening 31, the second operating opening 32, the general winning opening 33, and the like. When the state of the ordinary symbol is "in operation of the ordinary electric accessory," data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the effective period is stored in the second starting port effective period flag. If the state of the normal symbol is not "in operation of the normal electric auditors product", and the value of the second starting opening effective extension timer is not 0, that the second starting opening 12 is the effective period in the second starting opening effective period flag. If the value of the second starting opening valid extension timer is 0, the data indicating that the second starting opening is in the invalid period is stored in the second starting opening valid period flag.

In the prize monitoring process (S316), the game ball is inspected for passing through the switch, and when the game ball passes through the switch, the switch has no invalid period or the current valid period, and the prize ball payout is performed. If so, the winning counter is updated. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of a command.

In the prize ball control processing (S318), monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, command transmission request to the payout control board 155, command transmission to the payout control board 155, and inspection of received data from the payout control board 155. Are executed in order.

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 and the second operating port 32, and the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32. When the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol variation is less than 4, which is the upper limit value, the number of reserved symbols of the regular symbol is updated, and a random number related to the regular symbol is stored in the main RAM 291.

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol is being controlled, the process relating to the normal symbol display unit 45 or the normal electric auditors product 90 is executed. If the state of the normal symbol is "normal symbol changing", execute the normal symbol changing process, if "normal symbol stop symbol is displayed", execute the normal symbol stop symbol displaying process, "normal electric In the case of "while the accessory is operating", the process during operation of the normal electric auditors product is executed, and in the case of "during demonstration of completion of the operation of the normal electric auditors product", processing during the demonstration of completion of the operation of the ordinary electric auditors product is executed. In the normal symbol fluctuation process, after changing the normal symbol, the fluctuation time is monitored, and when it is judged that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is over, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set to stop and the state of the normal symbol is "normal". Set to "Stop symbol display". In the normal symbol stop symbol displaying process, the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol is finished, the operation end setting of the normal symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a hit, the state of the ordinary symbol is set to "during operation of the ordinary electric accessory", the operating state of the extension function of the ordinary electric accessory at the start of operation of the ordinary electric accessory is saved, and the operation of the ordinary electric accessory starts. The operation setting of the ordinary electric auditors product solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the ordinary electric auditors accessory opening extension function is executed. In the case of falling off, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal symbol variation standby". In the processing during the operation of the ordinary electric auditors product, when it is determined that the winning number of the winning port of the ordinary electric auditors object 90 of the game ball is monitored and the number of winnings of the winning port of the ordinary electric auditors object 90 has reached the maximum winning number. Executes the operation end setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the setting of the second starting opening effective extension time. If it is determined that the number of winnings of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum number of winnings, the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, When the opening/closing of the entrance of the prize hole related to is set and it is determined that the opening of the series of the normal electric auditors product 90 is finished, the operation end setting of the normal electric auditors product 90 and the second starting opening effective Execute extension time setting. If it is determined that the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning port for the ordinary electric auditors product 90 has not ended, the opening/closing of the entrance of the winning port for the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not executed. In the processing during the demonstration of the normal electric auditors product operation end, the operation end demonstration time of the normal electric auditors product 90 is monitored, and when it is determined that the operation end demo time of the normal electric auditors product 90 ends, the state of the normal symbol is "normal symbol" Set to “Waiting for change”.

In the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, "normal symbol fluctuation standby", and if the value of the normal symbol operation holding ball number is other than 0, fluctuation of the normal symbol It is determined to start. If you decide to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol, decrement the normal symbol operation holding ball number, execute the hit judgment, the determination of the stop symbol, the setting of the variation pattern number of the ordinary symbol, and the variation time of the ordinary symbol . Then, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal symbol changing", and the area of the main RAM 291 used for the state setting of the normal symbol, the hit determination, and the variation pattern determination is cleared.

In the starting opening monitoring control process (S326), the first starting opening 11 win and the second starting opening 12 win of the game ball are monitored. If the winning number of the game ball is confirmed when the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol is less than 4, the value obtained by adding the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the internal random number acquired, is acquired. Stored in the buffer as a random number per special symbol used in the big hit determination. Further, as the random number related to the special symbol, the symbol random number and the variation pattern random number are acquired and stored. When the second special symbol hold is prioritized over the first special symbol hold and is digested, only the update of the hold related to the winning is executed, but if the holding order of the special symbol is the winning order, In addition to updating the hold related to the prize, update the total hold number and store the winning order. Next, in order to request the notice production command corresponding to the random number stored at the time of winning the starting opening, if the state of the game machine is confirmed and it is judged that the command transmission period, a hit notice production request, a hit pattern notice production request, a pattern notice Rendering requests are executed in order. Here, (1) waiting per hit, and while storing the random number related to the first special symbol while the probability variation function of the ordinary symbol is not operating, (2) waiting per hit, and the ordinary symbol When the random variation related to the second special symbol is stored while the probability variation function is not operating, (3) When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored during the big hit or the small hit, in the case of corresponding to either , It is determined that it is the command transmission period. Next, request a performance command corresponding to the number of special operation pending balls. As a result, the fact that the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol has been updated is notified to the sub-board 300. As described above, in pre-reading, four pieces of advance determination information (advance determination information, advance symbol determination information, advance pattern determination information) and the number of reserved balls are transmitted to the sub-board 300 as a set. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of the command for the pre-determination process, but in another example, when there is a ball entering the starting opening, the transmission is uniformly performed and prefetching is possible. The sub CPU 310 may perform various status determinations such as whether it is a period. Subsequently, the value of the second starting opening valid period flag is inspected, and when the value of the second starting opening valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting opening 12 is in the valid period, the first starting opening winning Similar to the case, the second start mouth winning award monitoring process is executed. If the value of the second starting opening valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting opening 12 is in the invalid period, the monitoring processing of the second starting opening winning is not executed. In addition, when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of reserved balls is 0, the number of reserved balls is once changed from 0 to 1 here, and a control process relating to a variation start described later is executed. ..

In the special symbol control process (S328), the waiting state is inspected, and when the special electric accessory is operating, that is, during the big hit or the small hit, the special symbol control process ends. If the special electric accessory is not activated, the state of the special symbol is inspected, and if "special symbol variation standby", special symbol control general-purpose processing ends, and if "variation start", special symbol variation The start process is executed, and if the "special symbol is changing", the special symbol changing process is executed, and if the "special symbol stop symbol is being displayed", the special symbol stop symbol displaying process is executed. In the special symbol variation start processing, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the sub-board 300 starts the effect display, the variation. Request a command of additional symbol information, variation pattern, and character information, set the state of the special symbol to "during special symbol variation", and clear the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special symbol variation pattern with 0. . In the special symbol fluctuation process, after changing the special symbol, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is judged that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is over, the fluctuation stop setting of the special symbol is set and the state of the special symbol is "special. Set to "stop symbol display". In the special symbol stop symbol displaying process, the stop symbol display time of the special symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the special symbol is finished, the operation end setting of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a big hit, in order to end the operation of the special symbol, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol fluctuation", and the number of times the special electric auditors operate continuously is set. The probability of the special symbol Fluctuating function, fluctuation time shortening function for special symbols, probability fluctuation function for ordinary symbols, fluctuation time shortening function for ordinary symbols, and opening extension function for ordinary electric auditors are not activated, and the state of the gaming machine is ready for a special winning opening. Set to inside and set the hit start demo display time, command request for hit start demo effect, and command request for launch position designation effect (command request to execute an effect that suggests a recommended launch position such as "right hit") To execute. If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the operation finish determination of the variation time shortening function of the special symbol and the probability variation function of the ordinary symbol is performed, the variation pattern selection state is updated, the command request of the game state is made, and the special symbol In order to end the operation of, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol variation", the state of the gaming machine is set to small hit start demonstration, the setting of the hit start demonstration display time, the hit start demonstration production A command request and a command request for a firing position designation effect are executed. If the result of the hit determination is out of place, the operation finish determination of the variation time shortening function of the special symbol and the probability variation function of the ordinary symbol is performed, the variation pattern selection state is updated, the command request for the game state is made, and the special symbol In order to end the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to "standby for special symbol variation", and the command request for the launch position designation effect is executed.

In the special electric auditors product control process (S330), in order to execute the process relating to the special electric auditors product, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric auditors product is inspected, and the condition device is operating or the special electric auditors product is operating. If it is determined, the process related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating state of the special electric auditors, special winning opening opening preparation processing, special electric auditors operating processing, big winning opening closing processing, big hit end demonstration processing, small hit start demonstration processing, small hit special electricity Executes the processing during operation, the processing during the small hit big winning opening closing, and the processing during the small hit end demonstration.

In the special winning opening valid period setting process (S332), the result of determination of the valid period of the special winning opening 20 is stored. The mouth invalid period data is stored, and if it is other than 0, the special winning port valid period data is stored in the special winning port valid period flag.

In the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a state in which fluctuation can start. Digestion sequence of the reserve ball of the special symbol is the priority digestion of the second special symbol, (1) during the big hit or small hit, (2) the first special symbol is waiting for change, (3) ) That the second special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, (4) The number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol is other than 0, when all of the conditions are satisfied, the special symbol can start changing. To determine. If the order of the reserved balls of the special symbol is the winning order, in addition to the above (1) to (3), (5) the total number of reserved balls of the special symbol is other than 0, (6) When the determination matches the digestion order, that is, the winning order, and when all of the conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the special symbol can start changing.

When it is determined that the special symbol can start changing, the operation reserve sphere number of the special symbol is subtracted, and the effect command corresponding to the reserve sphere numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. This notifies the sub-board 300 that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

Then, the special symbol hit determination is executed. In the hit determination, it is determined by the special symbol per random number whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, the design is decided. In the determination of the symbol, if the hit determination is a big hit, the big hit symbol is determined based on the special symbol per symbol random number, if it is a small hit, the small hit symbol is determined, and if it is a hit, a hit symbol Is determined.

If the result of the hit determination is a big hit, based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the hit symbol determined in the symbol determination process, determine the operation content of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol, the special symbol Set the game state after the big hit, such as the operation contents of the variable time reduction function and the easy winning state of ordinary symbols. Next, the setting during the big hit is executed such as the number of times the special electric auditors continuously operate and the contents of the opening time of the special winning opening. Next, based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability variation function of the normal symbol, the variation pattern table to be referred to after the big hit is selected to set the content of the variation pattern selection state. Subsequently, the start demo time and the end demo time are set by referring to the table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of the winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "start of fluctuation".

If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, by selecting the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the small hit ends, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection state are set, the start demo time and the end demo time are set, and The area of the main RAM 291 used for the determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "start of fluctuation". When the result of the hit determination is out of alignment, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to “start of fluctuation”.

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290, which functions as the main error detection unit 284, inspects the magnetic detection signal, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the electric wave detection signal, and the door/frame opening signal, and changes to the error state. If there is, the error state is stored and the sub-board 300 is requested to display the error state effect of the gaming machine. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If the error state has not changed, the storage of the error state and the display request for the error state effect are not executed.

In the ball-in-passage time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290, which functions as the main error detection unit 284, monitors the continuous on-time of each switch level to detect the ball-in-passage time abnormality, and the continuous on-time ( For example, when it is determined that the value of the counter that is incremented for each interrupt when the switch is on) is an abnormal value, setting of an abnormal entry time of a ball, a request to send a command, and a security output to the external information output terminal 160 are performed. Create output requests in order. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the abnormal ball passing time. If it is determined that the continuous on-time is not abnormal, the security output request is not created.

In the game state display processing (S340), the number of times the special electric auditors operate continuously, the error state, the number of operation reserved balls of the normal symbol, and the number of operation reserved balls of the special symbol are requested to be displayed, and thus each display Create the data.

In the steering wheel state signal inspection process (S342), in order to monitor the steering wheel touch state, the steering wheel state is inspected, and when the inspection result shows that the steering wheel state has changed, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is decremented and the steering wheel state is checked. Update, setting of the steering wheel state monitoring timer, and a command transmission request for steering wheel state production are executed. When it is determined that the handle state has not changed as a result of the inspection, the handle state monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the value of the handle status monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being subtracted, and the subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output process (S344), the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of operation reserved balls of the special symbol, the display of the number of operation reserved balls of the normal symbol, the display of the game state, the special electric auditors continuously Initialization of the display in order to display the number of times it has operated, the operating state of the special electric auditors when the auditory continuous operating device is not activated, the display of sorting, the display of errors, and the display of the prize ball ratio. , Display data acquisition and output are sequentially executed.

In the launch control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting/permitting the launch of the game ball, setting of the prohibition/permission of launch corresponding to the communication state with the payout control board 155 and the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality, and After acquiring the firing prohibition/permission data, the firing prohibition/permission signal is output.

In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test device is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output process (S350), in order to output the output data of the normal electric prized solenoid 91 and the special winning opening solenoid 92, the output data of the normal electric prized solenoid 91 is acquired, and the output data of the special winning opening solenoid 92 is output. Perform acquisition and output of output data. An operation flag and an operation timer of each solenoid are acquired, and output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flag and the solenoid operation timer are acquired. Subsequently, the solenoid operation timer is updated and output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the effect control command transmission process (S352), whether or not there is a transmission request for a command to be transmitted to the sub-board 300 is inspected, and if it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired and the used command buffer is set to 0. After clearing, the MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data is acquired, the MODE data is output, the MODE data is held, the EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data is acquired, and the EVENT data is output.

In the external information output processing (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

The random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 described above will be described in more detail. Random numbers used in the main board 200, mainly as a random number related to the normal symbol, there is a random number per ordinary symbol, and a normal pattern variation pattern random number, as a random number related to the special symbol, a random number per special symbol (hard random number) , There is a soft random number per special symbol, a random symbol per special symbol, and a variation pattern random number. In addition, the initial value update type random number, as a random number to give an initial value of a normal symbol random number, a special symbol per symbol random number, and a special symbol per soft random number, a normal symbol initial value random number, a special symbol per symbol initial value There are random numbers and soft initial value random numbers per special symbol.

The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. Random number per normal symbol, in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the number of ordinary symbol fluctuations held Is less than the upper limit value of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol random number is used for the hit determination and the determination of the stopped symbol when it is determined that the variation of the normal symbol is started in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324).

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 232, is updated in various random number updating process (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. Normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number, in the normal symbol actuation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interruption process, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first actuation port 31 or the second actuation port 32, the suspension of the normal symbol variation When the number is less than the upper limit value of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. Normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number, in the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324), when it is determined that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, it is used for determining the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol.

Random number per special symbol, in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process, when the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed , The value of the built-in random number and the soft random number per special symbol is acquired, and the values are generated by adding them, and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The random number per special symbol is used to execute the big hit determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The soft random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning prize of the game ball is confirmed when the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting mouth monitoring control process (S326). Is obtained from a predetermined position of the above, and is used to generate a random number per special symbol as described above.

The symbol random number per special symbol takes a value of, for example, 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored at a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. Is stored. The symbol random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting mouth monitoring control process (S326). Is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The special symbol per symbol random number is used to determine the big hit symbol when the hit determination is a big hit in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The fluctuation pattern random number takes, for example, a value of 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), is updated in various random number update processing (S306) of the interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is a predetermined value in the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game sphere is confirmed when the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326). It is acquired from the position and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is used to determine the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

Normal initial value per random number, special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and special symbol per soft initial value random number, respectively, normal symbol random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and special symbol per soft random number value in the same range Then, it is updated in the initial value random number updating process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number updating process (S310) of the interrupt process, and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. Normal value per initial value random number, special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and special symbol per software initial value random number, in the initial value update type random number update process (S308), normal symbol per random symbol, special symbol per symbol random number, and special When updating the soft random number per symbol, it is used as the initial value of each random number.

Since the interrupt process is executed at regular time intervals by the timer interrupt, various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update-type random number update process (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular time intervals. It That is, a normal random number per symbol, a normal symbol variation pattern random number, a special symbol per random number, a special symbol per soft random number, a special symbol per symbol random number, a variation pattern random number are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, in the main process (S120), from the end of the interrupt process to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, that is, the time required for the interrupt process from the fixed time measured by the timer. Repeat for the reduced time. Since the time required for the interrupt process differs depending on the game state and the like, the initial value random number updating process (S208) in the main process (S120) is various random number updating process (S306) and initial value updating type random number updating process (S308). ), it is not executed at regular intervals. As a result, the initial value random number acquired when the initial value is set in the initial value updating type random number updating process (S308) can be made random every time.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the control start processing of the sub-board 300 in the pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the sub initial process execution unit 360, but hereinafter, it will be described as being executed by the sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub initial process execution unit 360. When the control of the sub-board 300 is started, the sub-CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), registers of the sub-CPU 310, port initialization, etc. Initial setting regarding hardware is executed (S504). The control program is read from the sub-ROM 312 and placed in the sub-RAM 311. Among various variables in the control program, an initial value is set for a variable having an initial value, and zero clear data is set for a variable having no initial value. As a result, the sub RAM 311 is initialized (S506). Note that the interrupt processing in the sub-board 300 includes processing when power is turned on and reset processing when various abnormalities occur when the watchdog function is enabled, as the interrupt processing executed with the highest priority. As the interrupt processing of the priority level 7 having the next highest execution priority, there is the command processing received from the main board 200, and as the interrupt processing of the priority level 3 having the next highest priority, the CPU runaway detection by the watchdog timer is performed. There is a time reset process. The next priority processing of priority level 2 is processing related to commands transmitted to and from the control CPU 320, and communication processing with a real-time clock is processing of priority level 1 with the lowest priority. And various devices such as lamps, solenoids and motors. If the interrupts related to the above-described various processes occur at the same time, the interrupts with the highest priority preset for each interrupt type are executed in priority. It should be noted that the processing shown in this figure includes the processing at power-on, which is the highest priority interrupt, and the reset processing when various abnormalities occur, and the reset processing when CPU runaway is detected, which is the priority level 3 interrupt. Including.

Interrupts (priority level 7) other than commands received from the main board 200 are prohibited (S510), and various error information used for the model is set from all error information stored for all models in advance (S512). . All the lamps such as the decoration lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the operation of the watchdog timer is started (S516), and the main process is executed (S518). Normally, the flow does not return from the main processing of S518 to this flow, but when it returns, it shifts to sleep (small power consumption mode) (S520).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in FIG. In S506 of FIG. 20, in order to check whether the control program arranged in the sub RAM 311 is correctly arranged in the main processing of this drawing, the start address for starting the check is acquired (S530), and in the subsequent processing. All interrupts are permitted (S532), and the initialization operation of devices such as motors and solenoids is executed (S534).

If it is set to use the watchdog timer, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), and the decorative symbol counter is updated so that the combination of decorative symbol deviations is a random combination (S540), and the input port of the sub CPU 310 Is monitored (S542). Since S540 is the process in the method of determining the out-of-decoration design of the decorative design using the counter, in the case of the method of determining the out-of-design design of the decorative design using the lottery sheet incorporating all of the symbol combinations that are out-of-design. Does not execute the process of S540. The process of determining the decorative symbol deviation symbol using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating a stop symbol of the special symbol is received from the main board 200 as described later in S552. The sub CPU 310, which functions as the sub error detection unit 364, monitors the error state and, when detecting various errors, notifies the error (S544) and executes processing according to the input state of the effect button 109 (S546). The advance notice lottery is executed (S548). In the notice lottery in S548, in particular, a notice effect command to appear immediately after the start of the symbol variation is transmitted to the effect control device 313 as soon as possible, and therefore the lottery process is not performed in one loop but is performed a plurality of times. Divide into loops, and draw the notice effect that appears immediately after the start of the pattern change in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, a lamp, a motor, or a solenoid, the operation is executed (S550), the command stored in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and immediately after the command analysis, the process proceeds to S536. Returning (Y of S554), when it is not immediately after the command analysis (N of S554), the lottery soft random number is updated as low priority processing which may be performed in the idle time (S556), and the processing returns to S536. In S552, if the command to be analyzed shows a variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol is determined by the process of S552, and if the command to be analyzed shows a stop symbol of the special symbol, the lottery sheet is selected. If it is a method of determining the out-of-design of the decorative design, the stop design of the decorative design is determined in the process of S552.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is a priority level 7 interrupt command having the second highest priority next to the reset interrupt and the error interrupt. When the data received from the main board 200 is read to the input port and the same data is read twice consecutively, the data is confirmed as a new command (Y in S600), and the confirmed command is the first command. If it is (MODE data) (Y of S602), the first command is stored in the temporary storage area (S604). A hard random number is obtained for subsequent processing (S606), and the process returns to the original routine. As described above, by acquiring the hard random number each time the main command is interrupted from the main board 200, the random number acquisition timing does not have periodicity, and the randomness of the value is enhanced. If the data read in S600 does not match twice consecutively (up to 5 times can be read), S602 is skipped and the process returns to the original routine (N in S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N in S602), if it is confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), the command buffer (command data) The command write pointer, which is the reading position in the ring buffer for use in the recording, is acquired (S610), and the first command and the second command are stored in the command buffer (S612). The command data stored in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command saved in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the process returns to the original routine. If the first command has not been received in S608, S610 and subsequent steps are skipped (N in S608), and the process returns to the original routine.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting a command related to effect display from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and occurs at a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y of S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). The command data is transmitted to the control CPU 320 by attempting to transmit the command up to three times at a predetermined time interval until the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 a command indicating that the control CPU 320 has normally received. After the transmission, the setting of the read address of the buffer is updated (S628), and the process returns to the original routine. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N in S622), S624 and subsequent steps are skipped and the process returns to the original routine.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command received by the sub CPU 310 from the control CPU 320 is a command mainly indicating that the command transmitted from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been normally received. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), the command is stored in the command buffer (S634), and the process returns to the original routine.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is an interrupt for lamp control of the decorative lamp 111 and the like, control of solenoids and motors for driving the movable accessory 66, and management control of various timers, and is generated in a 1 ms cycle. Since it is the interrupt of the priority level 1 having the lowest priority, the interrupt of the priority level 2 or higher is permitted (S640), the signal indicating the input from the effect button 109, the signal indicating the error detection, and the signal indicating the power failure. , Input/output of a port for inputting/outputting a drive signal or the like to/from a control target device such as a motor or a solenoid is processed (S642). At this time, when the signal indicating the power failure is input, the process immediately shifts to the backup process. Data related to device control, such as count processing based on control patterns of devices such as motors and solenoids and on/off control of a buffer for writing data to the port in S642, is updated (S644), and a timer for timing performance is set. It updates (S646), updates the timer for managing the effective input time of the effect button 109 (S648), and updates the task control counter for lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320, and the like. Then, a 16 ms cycle is created (S650).

The minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of the image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and an integral multiple thereof is set as the minimum unit of the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, so that the lamp control and the image display control can be easily synchronized. In addition, for example, when counting a relatively long period of time such as 30 seconds of error notification, if a count of 1 interrupt (1 ms) cycle is used, the count value becomes longer than necessary, but 16 ms The count value can be shortened by setting the count value of the cycle.

The task control includes 16 types of tasks from processing 0 to 15, one of which is lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, and two tasks are runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. The lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is performed once every 16 interrupts in accordance with the count value of the task control counter, thereby realizing switching in a 16 ms cycle. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, process 0 and process 8, and when the count value of the task control counter is 0 and 8, that is, once every 8 interrupts, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652). By doing so, monitoring in a cycle of 8 ms is realized.

Note that the control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that is turned on/off every frame, and if the toggle signal does not change at the same value continuously for 1600 ms, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and the sub CPU 310 is operated. Transmits a reset signal from the control CPU 320 to the control CPU 320, and the control CPU 320 that has received the reset signal executes the reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 at a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), the toggle signal is monitored at a cycle of 8 ms shorter than the cycle. Finally, the timer for managing a relatively long error notification period such as the error notification of 30 seconds as described above is subtracted (S654), and the error notification ends when the time-out occurs.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying the special symbol variation. When the second winning/winning lottery value is held (Y in S700), the second winning/winning determination means 222 reads the second winning/winning lottery value and determines the winning/winning of the second special symbol 52 (S702), and the second winning/winning result. The determination means 222 determines the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second variation pattern determination means 232 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and the variation start command together with the determined result. It transmits to the sub-board 300 to start the symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

When the second winning/winning lottery value is not held (N in S700) and when the first winning/winning lottery value is held (Y in S708), the first winning/winning determination means 221 determines the first winning/winning lottery. The value is read again to determine whether or not the first special symbol 51 is valid (S710), the first winning/disagreement determining unit 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determining unit 231 is The variation pattern of the 1 special symbol 51 is determined (S714), the variation start command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 along with the determined result, and the symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 is started (S716). When the first winning/winning lottery value is not reserved, the processing from S710 to S722 is skipped (N in S708).

The symbol variable display of the special symbol is processed (S718), S718 is repeated until a predetermined variation time elapses and the symbol display stop timing is reached (N of S720), and the predetermined variation time elapses and the symbol display is stopped. When the timing is reached (Y in S720), a variation stop command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 to stop the symbol variation being displayed at a predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the variation display of the special symbol is ended. To do.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the process of decorative pattern variable display. The effect determination means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command indicating the change start and effect display contents from the main board 200 (S750), and the stop of the received special symbol, the variation pattern, and the stop of the decorative symbol according to the result of judgment. The mode is determined (S752), and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined (S754). Here, when the sign setting is turned on by the prior determination (Y in S756), the already-determined variation effect pattern includes a specific effect content that should be avoided from being superimposedly displayed with the notice effect. If it is not (N of S758) and it is not the symbol variation that is the trigger for turning on the sign setting (N of S760), the setting for displaying a predetermined notice effect is executed (S764), and the sign setting is If it is a symbol variation that is a trigger for being turned on (Y in S760), the sign setting is turned off (S762). When the precursor setting is not on (N in S756) or when the variation effect pattern includes specific effect contents (Y in S758), the processes of S760 to S764 are skipped.

Then, the variation effect display of the decorative pattern is started (S766), the variation effect display process of the decorative pattern and (S768), the notice effect display process is executed (S770), and the variation stop command is received from the main board 200. S768 and S770 are repeated (N in S772), and when the fluctuation stop command is received (Y in S772), the decorative pattern is stopped by displaying the decorative pattern in the stop mode determined in S752 (S774). ), the decorative design variation effect ends (S776).

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the special game effect processing (S800), and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the special winning opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not elapsed (N in S804) and the number of balls entering the special winning opening 20 has not reached 9 balls or more, the process returns to S804 (N in S806), and the predetermined opening time has elapsed ( If the number of balls entering the special winning opening 20 reaches 9 or more (Y in S806) even though the opening time has not elapsed (Y in S804), the opening/closing control means 275 causes the special winning opening. 20 is closed (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), 1 is added to the number of rounds and the process returns to S802 (S812). If the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the effect display The control unit 305 ends the special game effect process (S814), the special game control unit 260 ends the special game (S816), and starts execution of the specific game, that is, the probability change, the time saving, and the easy entry state (S818). ).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a process of a small hit game. In the small hit game, a unit game that is executed only once is started (S819), the special winning opening 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time has elapsed (N of S822), and opened. If the time has elapsed (Y in S822), the special winning opening 20 is closed (S824), and if the opening/closing for the set number of times has not been completed (N in S826), 1 is added to the number of opening/closing and the process returns to S820. (S828), if the opening and closing of the set number of times has been completed (Y of S826), the small hit game is ended.

In the base technology, the number of big hits in the second game is generally larger than the number of big hits in the first game, that is, the second game is one big hit than the first game. In the above example, the expected value for winning the prize ball is increased, but in another example, the expected value for winning the first game may be designed to be higher than that of the second game. However, it may be designed so that the expected value of winning balls in the first game and the second game are substantially equal to each other. In the latter case, the number of unit games included in the special game executed in the first game and the special game executed in the second game may be designed to be equal to each other. For example, in the first game, a special game in which the unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 100% is executed, and in the second game, a special game in which the unit game is executed 4 times with a probability of 50%. However, a special game in which a unit game is executed 16 times with a probability of 50% may be executed. In any case, a special area is provided in the special winning opening, and when the game ball that entered the big winning opening enters the specific area or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the end of the special game. It may be configured such that a specific game such as a probability change state is executed. In this case, the special game executed when the big hit in the second game is easier to enter the specific area than the special game executed when the big hit is in the first game May be configured so that the probability that the normal game in the probability variation state is executed after the special game is high is high. For example, there is a first hit in which a special game that makes it relatively difficult to enter a specific area is executed, and a second hit in which a special game that makes it relatively easy to enter a specific area is executed. The second game may be provided so that the probability of winning the second game is higher than that of the first game. Alternatively, the probability of winning the second winning in the first game is less than 100%, but the probability of winning the second winning in the second game may be 100%.

(Example 1: Fall type)
The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below. In the present embodiment, the fall determination is performed to determine whether or not the probability variation state can fall to the normal probability state based on the lottery value acquired when the player enters the starting opening. When the probability variation state is entered after the end of the special game, the fall determination is executed upon the start of the symbol variation. If the fall determination is made to fall to the normal probability state in the fall determination, then the probability variation state ends and the normal probability state is entered. On the other hand, when the continuation determination is made in the fall determination so as not to fall to the normal probability state, the probability variation state is continued thereafter.

In this embodiment, the first lottery means 211 of FIG. 4 is further provided with a first fall determination means, and the second lottery means 212 is further provided with a second fall determination means. The first falling determination means executes the falling determination based on the lottery value acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216. The second fall determination means executes the fall determination based on the lottery value acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217. The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires the first fall lottery value for fall determination by the first fall determination means from the random number generation means 202 upon the entry into the first starting opening 11. The first falling lottery value acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 is acquired separately from the first win/loss lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value. The second lottery value acquisition unit 217 acquires the second falling lottery value for falling determination by the second falling determination unit from the random number generation unit 202, when the second starting opening 12 is entered. The second falling lottery value acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 is acquired separately from the second winning/winning lottery value, the second symbol lottery value, and the second pattern lottery value. As a modified example, the first falling lottery value may be acquired when the symbol variation of the first special symbol is started, instead of being triggered by the entry into the first starting opening 11. Similarly, the second falling lottery value may be acquired when the symbol variation of the second special symbol is started, instead of being acquired upon the entry of the ball into the second starting opening 12.

The first falling lottery value acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second falling lottery value acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 are special figure pending until a new symbol variation corresponding to the lottery value is started. It is reserved in the means 241. The pre-determination means 235 is capable of pre-determining the first falling lottery value and the second falling lottery value held in the special figure holding means 241 before the start of the symbol variation corresponding to the lottery value. The pre-determination means 235 pre-determines the transition of the gaming state based on the preliminary determination results of the first falling lottery value and the second falling lottery value, and the gaming state when the lottery value to be the target of the preliminary determination is finally determined. It is possible to determine in advance whether or not is a stochastic state or a normal stochastic state. The pre-determination means 235 can pre-determine the lottery value to be held in the special figure holding means 241 in accordance with the transition of the pre-judged game state.

In the present embodiment, the specific game control means 270 of FIG. 4 is provided with probability state control means and ball entry state control means. The stochastic state control means shifts from a normal probability state in which the probability of the hit/miss determination being a big hit is a predetermined probability to a probability varying state in which the probability of being a big hit in the hit/miss determination is a higher probability than the predetermined probability. The probability state control means shifts to the probability variation state after the end of the special game, when the condition that enables the transition to the probability variation state is satisfied. Stochastic state control means, when the condition that allows the transition to the normal probability state is satisfied, shifts to the normal probability state after the end of the special game or the start of the symbol variation. The ball entry state control means shifts from a normal ball entry state in which the ease of entry to the second starting port 12 is relatively low to an easy entry state in which the ease of entering the second starting port 12 is relatively high. Let When the condition that allows the transition to the easy entry state is satisfied, the entry state control means causes the entry state to transition to the easy entry state after the end of the special game. If the condition for terminating the easy-to-enter state (or the condition for transitioning to the normal-entering state) is satisfied, the entering-state controlling means moves to the normal-entering state after the end of the special game, or The start or end is used as a trigger to shift to the normal entry state.

The probability state control means enables the transition to the probability variation state after the end of the special game which is executed with a predetermined type of big hit symbol stopped and displayed. For example, a probability variation big hit symbol (first jackpot symbol) and a non-probability variation jackpot symbol (second jackpot symbol) are prepared as types of symbols indicating that it is a big hit, and are executed after the stop display of the first jackpot symbol. After the game is finished, the state is changed to the probability changing state, and after the special game executed after the second big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the state is changed to the normal probability state. The probability state control means, when a fall determination to fall to the normal probability state is made, shifts to the normal probability state immediately after the fall determination. When the symbol variation of the special symbol is started, each determination is made in the order of the fall determination, the hit determination, the symbol determination, and the variation pattern determination, and after each determination is made, the variation start process of the special symbol is executed. Further, when the fall determination to fall to the normal probability state is made, the processing is executed in the order of the fall determination, the transition from the probability varying state due to the fall to the normal probability state, and the success/failure determination. Therefore, when the symbol variation related to the fall determination to fall to the normal probability state is started, the game state (probability state) at the start of the symbol variation is the normal probability state, and whether or not the symbol variation is true or false. The game state at the time of execution is also a normal probability state.

FIG. 30 shows in detail the transition of the game state at the time of falling determination. This figure shows a special symbol corresponding to the falling lottery value used for the judgment of falling when the judgment of falling to the normal probability state (low probability state) is made in the probability fluctuation state (high probability state). The transition of the game state in the symbol variation (the variation) and the symbol variation before and after the variation is shown. As shown in the figure, when the fall determination to fall is made, the game state is transitioned by the fall determination, and at the variation start timing of the special symbol started immediately after the winning/disapproval determination, the high probability state is already low. It has been transferred to the stochastic state. As described above, when the variation of the symbol is started, the hit determination is executed after the fall determination, and therefore, the hit determination table for low probability is referred to in the hit determination performed after the fall determination to drop.

In this embodiment, when the state is changed to the probability varying state after the end of the special game, the state is changed to the probability varying state and the easy entry state. The easy-to-ball-in state is continued until at least the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations becomes a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), and the probability variation state continues during the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations becomes the predetermined number, or to the normal probability state. Whether or not to continue the easy entry condition is determined according to whether or not the player has fallen. Specifically, if the symbol variation frequency is a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) and the symbol is in the probability variation state at the time of the symbol variation, the easy entry state is continued. After that, when the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 101 times or more), if a fall determination to fall to the normal probability state is made when the symbol fluctuation is started, the state shifts to the normal probability state and the normal entry state. Then, the symbol variation is started in the normal probability state and the normal entry state. On the other hand, if the symbol variation number is a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) and is in a normal probability state at the time of symbol variation, the end of the symbol variation is used as a trigger to shift from the easy entry state to the normal entry state. In other words, it is in the easy entry state until the end of the 100th symbol variation, but becomes the normal entry state in the 101st and later symbol variations. As a modified example, if the symbol variation frequency is a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) in a normal probability state at the time of symbol variation, the start of the symbol variation may be used as a trigger to shift from the easy entry state to the normal entry state. .. That is, it is in the easy-to-enter state until the end of the symbol variation immediately before the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, the 99th time), but the normal variation state may be set in the 100th and later symbol variations. In addition, "the number of times of symbol variation" refers to the total number of times of variation of the first special symbol and the number of times of variation of the second special symbol. In most cases, only the second game in which the second special symbol is changed in the easy-to-enter state is played, so the number of symbol changes that can be the end of the easy-to-enter state is the cumulative change number of the second special symbol. Can agree.

FIG. 31 shows the transition of the game state after the transition to the probability varying state and the easy entry state. In this figure, the probability variation state is "high probability" and the normal probability state is "low probability". Further, the easy entry state is defined as "high entry" and the normal entry state is defined as "low entry". This figure (a) shows the case where a fall determination to fall to the normal probability state is made in the first symbol variation after the end of the special game. In this case, from the first symbol variation after the end of the special game to the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), there is a low probability and a high entry state. After that, the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (101st time), and a low probability and low ball entry state result from the symbol fluctuations. In this figure (b), the number of symbol fluctuations that can be the end of the easy entry condition is a predetermined number (for example 100 The figure shows a case where a fall determination to fall to the normal probability state is made by the time of the symbol fluctuation. In this case, at the start of the first symbol change after the end of the special game, there is a high probability and a high ball entry state, after which the symbol variation within the predetermined number of symbol variations (2nd to 100th) is started. When the fall determination to fall to the normal probability state is made, a low probability and a high entry state result from the symbol variation related to the fall determination to the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number (100 times, for example). After that, the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (101st time), and a low probability and low ball entry state result from the symbol fluctuations. This figure (c) shows the case where all the determinations are continuous without making the fall determination to fall to the normal probability state by the symbol variation when the number of symbol variations becomes a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). In this case, the high-probability and high-incidence state continues until a fall determination is made to fall to the normal probability state, and then a low-probability and low-ball entry is made if a fall determination to fall to the normal probability state is made. It becomes a state.

In the easy-to-enter state (high-entering state), the normal electric accessory 90 operates to increase the easiness of entering the second starting opening 12, and therefore, "right hit" toward the second starting opening 12. It becomes a game play property. On the other hand, in the normal ball entry state (low ball entry state), the easiness of entering the second starting opening 12 is low, and entering the second starting opening 12 becomes impossible or difficult, so the first starting opening 11 It becomes a game play that "left-handed" toward. In order to urge the player to perform an appropriate firing operation according to the gaming state, the effect display device 60 is provided with a “guidance display” urging the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction. For example, in the easy-to-enter state, a right hit display is displayed to urge the player to shoot the game ball to the right. It should be noted that the player may be informed by a display device different from the effect display device 60 that the player is in the right-handed state, and, for example, turns on a "right-handed indicator light" composed of an LED lamp or the like. As a result, a guidance display indicating that the game state is to be hit to the right may be made. In addition, the guidance display that is dramatically displayed on the performance display device 60 and the guidance display by lighting a “right-handed indicator light” such as an LED lamp may be used together.

FIG. 32 shows an example of effect display in the easy-to-enter state. As shown in the figure, a decorative pattern composed of a plurality of rows (for example, three rows) of decorative symbol rows is variably displayed in the center of the screen, and the upper right portion of the screen indicates that the game state is right-handed. "Strike display" is made. The right-handed display is composed of a combination of the word "right-handed" and an arrow or a symbol indicating the right direction. The words and symbols included in the right-handed display may be scrolled and displayed in the right direction. The right-handed display may be fixedly displayed in a specific display area such as the upper right of the screen. The right-handed display may be set to have a higher display priority so that it is displayed in front of the decorative design and other effect displays. In the lower right part of the screen, the number of remaining times (70 times) until reaching the predetermined number of symbol variation times that can be the end of the easy entry state is displayed. The display mode of the remaining number of times is not limited to the example shown in this figure. For example, the remaining number is not always displayed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the screen, such as the lower right of the screen, but the "remaining 70 , Etc. may be temporarily displayed. For example, when the number of remaining times is a specific number (for example, a multiple of 10 such as 30 times, 20 times, 10 times), highlighting such as “30 remaining!” may be displayed in the center of the screen, or the number of remaining times is specified. When the number is less than or equal to a number (for example, 9 times or less), highlighting for counting down the remaining number such as “9! remaining”, “8! Such highlighting of the remaining number of times and the remaining number of times displayed near the outer periphery of the screen shown in this figure may be used together, and when both are used together, they are always displayed near the outer periphery of the screen. The display area for highlighting the remaining number of times may be larger than the display area for the remaining number of times. The number of remaining times displayed on the screen is the number of remaining times in the easy-to-enter state that is guaranteed at the minimum regardless of the number of times the number of fluctuations in the symbol is determined to fall, and the number of fluctuations in the symbol is predetermined. If the fall determination to fall is not made by the time the number reaches 100 (for example, 100 times), the easy entry state may continue when the number of symbols exceeds a predetermined number (eg after 101 times). When the easy-to-enter state continues in the symbol variation exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 101 times or more), the remaining number is not counted down at the start of the symbol variation such as "??", and the remaining number is clearly indicated. Alternatively, the player may be informed that the easy entry state further continues by switching to a hidden display mode. Although the present embodiment is premised on the fall determination, in the modified example in which the fall determination is not executed, the remaining number displayed on the screen is not the minimum guaranteed remaining number in the easy entry state, It may match the actual number of remaining times until the easy state ends.

The above-mentioned right hit display is hidden when the easy entry state (high entry state) ends. That is, it is hidden at the timing of shifting to the normal ball entry state (low ball entry state). In addition, the timing of shifting from the easy entry state to the normal entry state may be triggered by the start or end of the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations that can be the end of the easy entry state becomes a predetermined number (100 times). it can. Specifically, it can be immediately after the start of the symbol fluctuation in which the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100 times) or after the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation in which the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100 times) has stopped. In the present embodiment, if the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the special game is within a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 100 times), it is determined that the symbol falls to the normal probability state when the symbol fluctuation is started. , The number of symbol fluctuations becomes a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) just before the symbol fluctuation starts (corresponding to FIG. 33(a) described later) or after the fluctuation stops (corresponding to FIG. 33(b) described later) To the normal entry state. Here, after the fluctuation stop of the symbol fluctuation may be the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol, or the end timing of the stop display period for maintaining the stop display state of the special symbol until the next symbol fluctuation is started. It may be.

FIG. 33 shows in detail the transition of the game state at the end of the easy entry state. This figure, the symbol variation of the special symbol that the number of symbol variations that can be the end of the easy entry state (high entry state) is a predetermined number (100th) and the symbol variation before and after that (99th and 101st) Indicates a state transition. In this figure (a) and (b), the number of symbol fluctuations falls within a predetermined number (1st to 100th times), and it is determined that the symbols will fall. ) It shows a case where the high-ball entry state does not continue when the design changes. This figure (a) shows the case where the game state is shifted by the start of the symbol fluctuation (100th time) that the number of symbol fluctuations after the special game is a predetermined number is a trigger, and the variation start timing of the special symbol is high. The ball state has been changed to a low ball entry state. This figure (b) shows the case where the game state is shifted to the end of the symbol fluctuation (100th) when the number of symbol fluctuations after the special game becomes a predetermined number, and when the special symbol fluctuation stop timing is high The ball state has been changed to a low ball entry state. In addition, it is not the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol, but the number of symbol fluctuations after the special game is a predetermined number after the symbol fluctuation (100th) is stopped and before the start of the next symbol fluctuation (101st). The ball state may be changed to the low ball entry state. For example, as described above, the high entry state may be shifted to the low entry state at the end timing of the stop display period of the special symbol.

FIG. 34 shows an example of an effect display in the case where the easy-to-enter state ends with the start of the symbol fluctuation, which is the end of the easy-to-enter state. This figure corresponds to the case where the state transition shown in FIG. This figure (a) shows the display example at the time of stop of fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation of the one before (the 99th) when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a detached manner in the center of the screen, At the bottom right, the number of remaining easy-to-enter states is one more. At this time, the right-handed display is displayed on the upper part of the screen. This figure (b) shows the display example at the time of the start of the symbol variation where the number of symbol variations becomes a predetermined number (100th time), the variation of the decorative symbol in the center of the screen is started, and the remaining number of times at the lower right of the screen is 0. It has become a time. At this time, the right hit display on the upper part of the screen is not displayed, which suggests that the easy entry state has ended. This figure (c) shows a display example at the time of stop of fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100th time), and the decorative symbol is displayed in a detached manner in the center of the screen. After that, when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100th time) and the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuations is stopped, as shown in this figure (d), “BATTTLE RUSH end” indicating that the easy entry state has ended In addition to displaying the wording, a guidance display is displayed to urge the player to return to left-handedness. It should be noted that the display of "BATTLE RUSH end" and the display of "return to the left" may be displayed not at the same time but at different timings in this figure (d). For example, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol variation (the 100th time) when the symbol variation number becomes a predetermined number (that is, before the variation of the special symbol is stopped), "BATTTLE RUSH end" is displayed, and then The special symbol and the decorative symbol may be stopped and the next symbol variation may be started. At the beginning of the variation or after the variation is displayed, the guide display of “Please return to the left” may be displayed. In other words, the guide display that prompts the player to return to the left-handed stroke is not displayed until the end of the symbol fluctuation when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100th time), and is displayed after the start of the next symbol fluctuation. May be.

FIG. 35 shows an example of an effect display when the easy-to-enter state ends with the end of the symbol fluctuation, which is the end of the easy-to-enter state. This figure shows a case where the state transition shown in FIG. This figure (a), similar to FIG. 34(a), shows the display example at the time of stop of fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation one before (99th) when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, and the decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen. It is stopped and displayed in a detached manner, and the number of remaining times in the easy-to-enter state is once at the lower right of the screen. At this time, the right-handed display is displayed on the upper part of the screen. This figure (b) shows the display example at the time of the start of the symbol variation that the number of symbol variations becomes a predetermined number (100th time), the variation of the decorative symbol in the center of the screen is started, and the remaining number at the lower right of the screen is 0. It has become a time. At this time, the right hit display at the top of the screen is continuously displayed, which suggests that the easy entry state is continued. This figure (c) shows the display example at the time of stop of fluctuation of the design fluctuation of which the number of design fluctuations becomes a predetermined number (100th time), and the decorative design is displayed in a detached manner at the center of the screen. At this time, the right-handed display at the top of the screen is still displayed. After that, when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100th time) and the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuations is stopped, as shown in this figure (d), “BATTTLE RUSH end” indicating that the easy entry state has ended The wording is displayed, the right-handed display at the top of the screen is hidden, and a guide display is displayed to urge the player to return to the left-handed display. In addition, also in this figure (d), the display of "BATTLE RUSH end" and the display of "please return to the left-hand side" may be displayed not at the same time but at different timings. For example, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol variation (the 100th time) when the symbol variation number becomes a predetermined number (that is, before the variation of the special symbol is stopped), "BATTTLE RUSH end" is displayed, and then After the special symbols and decorative symbols are stopped and the next symbol fluctuation starts, the guide display of "Please return to the left" may be displayed. In other words, the guide display that prompts the player to return to the left-handed stroke is not displayed until the end of the symbol fluctuation when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100th time), and is displayed after the start of the next symbol fluctuation. May be.

FIG. 36 shows an example of an effect display in the case where the easy-to-enter state continues even after the end of the symbol variation that can be the end of the easy-to-enter state. This figure corresponds to the state transition of FIG. This figure (a)-(c) is the same as that of FIG.35(a)-(c). The number of symbol changes in this figure (c) becomes a predetermined number (100th time) After the variation of the symbol change stops, the decorative symbol is displayed in a disengaged mode, and then the number of symbol changes becomes the predetermined number (100th time). When the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation is stopped, as shown in this figure (d), the phrase "EXTRA RUSH plunge!!" indicating that the easy-to-enter state and the probability fluctuation state continue will be displayed, and right-handed at the top of the screen. The display is also continuously displayed. In addition, this figure (d) may be displayed during the symbol variation next to the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations becomes a predetermined number (100th time). In addition, this figure (d) may be displayed before the stop of fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation (the 100th time) when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, and after the display of this figure (d) is made, the number of symbol fluctuations May be configured such that the predetermined number of (100th) symbol fluctuations stop fluctuating.

FIG. 37 shows the transition of the game state in detail when the fall determination to fall to the normal probability state is made after the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number. This figure does not make a fall determination to fall until the number of symbol fluctuations after the special game reaches a predetermined number (100 times), and the probability fluctuation state in the symbol fluctuation exceeding the predetermined number (after 101 times) ( It shows a case where a fall determination is made to the effect that the player falls after the high probability state) and the easy entry state (high entry state) continue. As described above, when a fall determination to make a fall is made, a transition from a high probability state to a low probability state is made immediately after the fall determination to make a fall, so it is already low at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol related to the fall determination. It is in a stochastic state. At this time, since the high-incidence ball state is configured to end when the high-probability state ends, the end timing of the high-probability state and the end timing of the high-incidence state are not strictly simultaneous. However, since the end timing of the high probability state and the high entry state are both before the variation start timing of the special symbol related to the fall determination, both the high probability state and the high entry state before the start of the symbol variation. Can be said to end almost at the same time. As a result, at the variation start timing of the special symbol related to the fall determination to the fall, it has already been transitioned to the low ball entry state, and the right change is triggered by the start of the symbol variation of the special symbol related to the fall determination to the fall The display is hidden.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing in detail the transition of the game state in the case where the winning/disapproval determination is a big hit after the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number. This figure does not make a fall determination to fall until the number of symbol fluctuations after the special game reaches a predetermined number (100 times), and the probability fluctuation state in the symbol fluctuation exceeding the predetermined number (after 101 times) ( It shows a case where the result of the hit/miss judgment is a big hit in a state where the high probability state) and the easy entry state (high entry state) continue. As shown in the figure, if the result of the hit determination is a big hit, since it shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state immediately after the hit determination, the game at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol related to the hit determination The state is already in the low probability state. At this time, the high-incidence state is configured to end when the high-probability state ends, but the end timing of the high-probability state and the end timing of the high-incidence state are almost at the same time. The end timing of each of the sphere states is earlier than the change start timing of the special symbol related to the hit determination which is the big hit. As a result, at the variation start timing of the special symbol related to the jackpot determination, it has already been transitioned to the low-entry state, and triggers the start of the symbol variation of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery value for which the jackpot determination is made. As a result, the right-handed display is hidden. As a modified example, the result of judgment whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) and the easy entry state (high entry state) continue in the pattern variation in which the number of symbol changes exceeds a predetermined number (after 101 times) If is a big hit, the high probability state is ended immediately after the start of the symbol change triggered by the start of the symbol change of the special symbol related to the winning/disapproval judgment, and immediately after the end of the high probability state is triggered by the end of the high probability state. It may be configured to terminate the high-income state. Here, "immediately after" means that the timings are almost the same, although they are later in time series.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display in the case where the hit determination is a big hit after the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number. This figure corresponds to the state transition of FIG. This figure (a) shows the display example at the time of fluctuation stop of the symbol fluctuation which is one before the symbol fluctuation which is a big hit and the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (after 101st time). In the center of the screen, a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a detached manner, and at the bottom right of the screen, the word "EXTRA RUSH" indicating that the player stays in a mode in which the probability fluctuation state and the easy entry state continue . The right-handed display is displayed at the top of the screen. This figure (b) shows the display example at the time of the start of the symbol fluctuation in which the number of symbol fluctuations is a symbol fluctuation exceeding the predetermined number (after the 101st time) and the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit. The decorative pattern in the center of the screen starts to change, and the word "EXTRA RUSH" is continuously displayed at the lower right of the screen. At this time, the right-handed display at the top of the screen is hidden, which suggests that the probability variation state and the easy entry state have ended. After that, when the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 101 times or more) and the symbol fluctuation is a symbol fluctuation and the result of the hit determination is a big hit, as shown in this figure (c), the center of the screen The decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 7D, the phrase "SPECIAL BONUS acquisition!" indicating that the special game is to be performed is displayed, and the special game accompanied by opening of the special winning opening is started. The screen display timing of this figure (d) is when the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation in which the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 101 times or more) and the result of the hit/miss judgment is a big hit. When the special winning opening that is opened during the special game is provided at a position where it is easy or possible to enter the ball by right-handing, the guide display for right-handing is displayed at the start demonstration of the special game, and the right is displayed during execution of the special game. The striking display is continued. As a modification, the phrase "SPECIAL BONUS acquisition!" shown in FIG. 7D may be displayed during the start demonstration of the special game, and at the same time a right-handed guide display may be displayed during the start demonstration.

Due to the above state transition, the high entry state is continued at least until the number of symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (100 times), and the gaming state until the number of symbol changes reaches the predetermined number is "high probability and high entry". Or it is either "low probability and high ball entry". Since the player cannot directly know whether the winning/probability of being a big hit is a high probability or a low probability, whether or not the probability changing state is the probability changing state until the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100 times). It may be in a hidden “hidden mode”. On the other hand, when the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number, the gaming state becomes either “high probability and high entry ball” or “low probability and low entry ball”. Therefore, when the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number, by confirming the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 90 (also referred to as a ball entry variation mechanism) provided in the second starting opening 12, a high entry state or a low entry It is possible to discriminate which of the states, and indirectly to discriminate between the high-probability state and the low-probability state. Therefore, when the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number, it is possible to enter the “non-latent mode” in which it is not concealed whether or not it is the probability fluctuation state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a high probability and high entry state is entered after the end of the special game, at least until the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (100 times), it is a high probability state or a low probability state. It is assumed that the player is not notified. In other words, at least until the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (100 times), even if the player has fallen to a low probability state by the fall determination, the player is not notified of the fall. As a result, the expectation that the high-probability state may be continued until the start of the pattern variation exceeding the predetermined number (101st time), which makes it possible to determine whether it is the high-probability state or the low-probability state, Can be given to players. As described above, when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100 times), when the word "EXTRA RUSH rush!!" or "BATTTLE RUSH end" is displayed, the symbol fluctuation It is possible to determine whether it is a high-probability state or a low-probability state in the symbol variation in which the number of times is a predetermined number (100 times).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number (100 times), the high probability state continues to be stimulated at the time of the symbol variation, and whether or not the high probability state continues is given to the player. It is possible to execute a notification effect for notification. It is desirable that this notification effect be executed by a symbol variation in which the result of the hit determination is out, and the notification effect may not be executed in the symbol variation in which the result of the hit determination is a big hit. In order to be able to execute the notification effect with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to select a variation pattern (for example, 30 seconds) in which the variation time is relatively long when the symbol variation number is a predetermined number (100 times). Good. On the other hand, in the symbol fluctuation in which the number of symbol fluctuations is other than the predetermined number (100 times), the “time saving fluctuation pattern” may be selected to realize the time saving state. In the symbol variation where the number of symbol variations is other than the predetermined number (100 times), the variation time is shortened according to the number of lottery values held in the special figure holding means 241. May be realized, and a variation pattern having a shorter variation time may be selected when the number of reservations is three or four as compared with the case where the number of reservations is one or two. Good. More specifically, the larger the number of first winning/winning lottery values held in the special figure holding means 241, the easier it is to select a pattern having a shorter fluctuation time as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. As the number of second winning/winning lottery values held in the drawing holding means 241 increases, a pattern having a shorter fluctuation time may be more easily selected as a fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, since the variable display of the second special symbol is prioritized in the high entry state, the number of second winning/winning lottery values is relatively large regardless of the number of first winning/winning lottery values to be held. In the case (for example, when 3 pieces are reserved), a pattern with a short fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) is likely to be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, while the number of second winning/winning lottery values is large (for example, 1 It is preferable that a pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) is easily selected as a fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the case of holding). In addition, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, a relatively long fluctuation pattern (for example, 60 seconds) is selected regardless of the number of holdings, so the result of the hit determination is deviated and selected by the symbol fluctuation. It is preferable to apply the above-mentioned specification in the fluctuation pattern.

When the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number (100 times), the specific variation pattern for notification effect (informing variation pattern) may be selected. In addition, when the fall judgment is made to fall until the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100 times) (including the case of making a fall judgment in the fall judgment relating to the 100th symbol change) Only, the informing variation pattern for informing that the fall has occurred in the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number (100 times) may be selected without fail. In other words, there is no fall determination to fall until the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100 times), and the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds the predetermined number (after 101 times) with high probability and high entry When the sphere state continues, the notification variation pattern may not be selected in the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations becomes a predetermined number (100 times). At this time, in the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number (100 times), a pattern other than the notification variation pattern may be selected without fail, or the notification variation pattern is selected at a constant rate. Good. When the notification variation pattern is not selected, the time saving variation pattern may be selected, or a variation pattern having a shorter variation time may be more easily selected as the number of holdings is larger.

The above-mentioned notification effect may be configured to be completed in one symbol variation period, or may be configured to be executed over a plurality of symbol variation periods. In the latter case, a specific change pattern for notification effect (notification change pattern) may be selected in all of the plurality of symbol changes for executing the notification effect. For example, in a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) symbol fluctuations (that is, 96 to 100 times of symbol fluctuations) until the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100 times), a specific notification fluctuation pattern can be selected. It may be. At this time, each variation time of a plurality of symbol variations (for example, 96 to 100 symbol variations) may be common, or each variation time may not be common. For example, when the number of symbol fluctuations is a symbol fluctuation other than a predetermined number (for example, 96 to 99 times), a notification variation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time is selected, while the number of symbol fluctuations is a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations (for example, 100). In the case of “time”, a notification variation pattern having a relatively long variation time may be selected.

If the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number (101 times or more) and the easy-to-enter state continues in the symbol variation, as with the symbol variation within the predetermined number, the "short-term variation pattern" with a relatively short variation time is selected. Therefore, the time saving state may be realized. In the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number (after 101 times), the variation time is shortened according to the number of lottery values held in the special figure holding means 241. “Variation” may be realized, and a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is selected when the number of reservations is 3 or 4 as compared with the case where the number of reservations is 1 or 2. Good. That is, it may be configured such that the larger the number of holdings, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time. In addition, only a fixed variation pattern may be selected in the symbol variation in which the symbol variation number exceeds a predetermined number (after 101 times), and the symbol variation number is selected in the symbol variation within a predetermined number (100 times). It may be possible to select a super-fast fluctuation pattern that has a shorter fluctuation time than the time-shortening fluctuation pattern for “shortening fluctuation” or “ultra-shortening fluctuation”.

The selection tendency of the variation pattern of the special symbol may be changed or switched midway according to the number of symbol variations after the special game so that the above-mentioned specific variation pattern (variation pattern for notification) can be selected. .. For example, a first variation pattern selection criterion in which a specific variation pattern is not included in the selection candidates and a second variation pattern selection criterion in which a specific variation pattern is included in the selection candidates are prepared, and the variation pattern is determined according to the number of symbol variations. The selection criteria of may be changed or switched. For example, the variation pattern is determined based on the first variation pattern selection criterion in the symbol variation before the symbol variation number reaches the predetermined number (up to 99 times), and the symbol variation number becomes the predetermined number (100th). The fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the second fluctuation pattern selection criterion. As a result, the specific variation pattern cannot be selected in the symbol variation before the symbol variation number reaches the predetermined number (up to 99 times), and the symbol variation number becomes the predetermined number (100th) in the symbol variation. The variation pattern can be selected. The selection tendency of three or more variation patterns is prepared, and the selection tendency is changed or switched a plurality of times (for example, twice) in the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations after the special game is within a predetermined number (within 100 times). You may.

On the other hand, when the number of symbol variations after the special game exceeds a predetermined number (after 101 times), in the symbol variation, even if the selection tendency of the variation pattern of the special symbol is not changed or switched midway according to the number of symbol variations. Good. That is, when the number of symbol variations after the special game exceeds a predetermined number (after 101 times), the variation pattern may be determined based on one variation pattern selection criterion regardless of the number of symbol variations. .. Even when the number of symbol variations after the special game exceeds a predetermined number (after 101 times), the selection criterion of the variation pattern may be changed or switched according to the number of symbol variations. In this case, the number of changes in the selection tendency of the variation pattern in the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations after the special game exceeds the predetermined number is the variation pattern in the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations after the special game is within the predetermined number. It may be less than the number of changes in the selection tendency. For example, when the number of symbol changes is within a predetermined number, the change pattern selection tendency is changed twice or more, whereas when the number of symbol changes exceeds a predetermined number, the change pattern selection tendency is changed only once. It does not have to be done.

In the present embodiment, it may be configured to shift to the “high probability and high entry state” or “low probability and high entry state” after the end of the special game depending on the type of the big hit symbol. That is, the probability of transition to the probability variation state after the big hit may be less than 100%. For example, when a special game is executed with a big hit symbol A or a big hit symbol B and a special game is executed, the special game is transitioned to a high probability and high-incidence state after the special game, and a special game is executed with a big hit pattern C and a big hit. In this case, the state may be changed to a low probability and high entry state after the special game. Furthermore, when a special game is executed with a big hit symbol A, the game state after the special game is shifted to the "probability change confirmation mode" in which the player is informed that the game state is a probability variation state. When the special game is executed with the big hit symbol B or the big hit symbol C and the special game is executed, the state is shifted to the "concealment mode" in which it is kept secret from the player whether the game state after the special game is the probability variation state. Good. It should be noted that the probability variation confirmation mode is not provided, and even if any big hit symbol is a big hit, it shifts to a "secret mode" in which it is hidden to the player whether the game state after the special game is a probability variation state. You may do it.

In the present embodiment, depending on whether or not a game ball enters a specific area within the special winning opening that is opened in the special game after the big hit, after the special game, the "high probability and high ball entry state" or "low probability" The state may be changed to the “probability and high ball entry state”. In other words, only when the player enters a specific area provided within the special winning opening during the special game, the state is changed to the "high probability and high entry state" after the special game, and the special area provided within the special winning opening is provided during the special game. If the player does not enter the ball, the state is changed to the “low probability and high entry state”. In this case, regardless of whether or not there is a ball in a specific area within the special winning opening during the special game, the "secret mode" is set to conceal to the player whether or not the game state is the probability variation state after the special game. May be migrated. Furthermore, during the special game, the display such as "Aim for V!" that aims to enter a specific area within the special winning opening is not displayed, and the probability variation state is entered by entering a specific area (V prize). Whether or not it may be more effectively concealed.

In the present embodiment, the number of symbol fluctuations is within a predetermined number (1 to 100 times), and the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds the predetermined number (after 101 times), the degree of expectation of a big hit or The production tendency and the occurrence frequency of the notice production or the prefetch production (collectively referred to as the expectation suggestion production) that suggests the degree of expectation to be a big hit with probability variation may be different. Here, the notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit is an effect in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is determined during the change. On the other hand, the look-ahead effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit is an effect based on the preliminary determination result of the win/loss lottery value held in the special figure holding means 241, and the pattern in which the pre-read win/win lottery value is consumed It is an effect that is executed before the start of fluctuation.

As an example of the degree of expectation suggestion production, a temporary stop display that makes it appear as if the decorative pattern was stopped and displayed in the pseudo continuous variation production, or a pseudo continuous exclusive design that suggests the effect content after the temporary stop is temporarily displayed in the temporary stop display. Cases are included. Further, in the reach variation effect accompanied by the reach mode of the decorative pattern, the pre-reach notice executed before the reach mode or the post-reach notice executed after the reach mode can also correspond to the expectation suggestion effect. .. Specific examples of pre-reach notice and post-reach notice include cut-in production that displays the wording that suggests the degree of expectation and the display of character images for a relatively short time (about several seconds), or enters or develops a state with higher expectation. It is a special zone entry effect that suggests to do. In these notice effects, a character of a type corresponding to the high degree of expectation may be displayed, or characters or a window frame may be displayed in a display color corresponding to the high degree of expectation. In addition, by changing the background display, adding a band-like display that indicates the zone in which you are staying, and adding an object image that indicates high expectation to the specific zone on the screen, etc. A rush effect to a state in which the movable accessory 66 is operated may be displayed, or an accessory operation effect for activating the movable accessory 66 may be executed. In addition, when the movable accessory 66 is provided with an illumination lamp, the movable accessory 66 may be operated while lighting the movable accessory with a display color corresponding to the high degree of expectation.

The expectation suggestion production may be executed during so-called super reach production. The variable production with super reach production includes pre-reach production, post-reach production, and post-reach development production (so-called super-reach production), and super-reach production is composed of multiple stages of development production executed after reach. Sometimes. In addition, the expectation suggestion production may be executed in the pre-reach production before the development to the super reach production and the post-reach production, and the expectation suggestion production may be executed in the development production after the reach. The post-reach effect may include a common effect that is at least partially common to the effect content executed in a so-called normal reach effect, which is not a super-reach effect, and after the execution of the common effect, progress to the next stage (that is, the super effect). It may be a production that raises the degree of expectation by executing a notice production that suggests the development to reach production). When the development effect has a plurality of stages, the expectation suggestion effect may be executed in at least one of the plurality of stages, or the expectations suggestion effect may be executed in two or more of the plurality of stages or in each stage. A wide variety of super reach effects may be realized by preparing a plurality of types of development effects, changing the number of stages of the development effects, and changing the display order of the plurality of types of development effects. For example, a reach-up effect in which the post-reach development effect is stepped up may be executed by successively executing a plurality of types of development effects in sequence. Further, during the execution of the development effect of each stage, or at the timing between the development effects of each stage, even if the above-mentioned cut-in effect, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, the temporary stop display of the pseudo-only symbol, etc. are executed. Good. Further, in the variable effect accompanied by the super reach effect, a display color of high expectation such as a gold color or a giraffe pattern may be used as a display mode of the cut-in effect or the pseudo-relational exclusive pattern.

The expectation suggestion effect may be executed at a timing immediately before the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol. The expectation suggestion effect executed immediately before the fluctuation stop may be an effect for definitively notifying the result of the fluctuation, for example, after the display that prompts the player to perform an input operation with the effect button 109 or the lever 112. The input operation may be a specific operation effect that can be started. This specific operation effect is, for example, an effect operation effect in which the movable accessory 66 is operated, and when the effect operation effect is executed in a lighting color such as rainbow, the hit result is a big hit or a certain change. A big hit is definitely announced. On the other hand, it is suggested that there is a high degree of expectation that the hit result will be a big hit when the accessory action effect is executed with a lighting color other than rainbow, for example, white, blue, green, red, or the like. It may be suggested that the lighting color of the accessory that has a high degree of expectation increases in the order of white, blue, green, and red, and in the case of these lighting colors other than iridescent, the winning or failing result is a big hit. It may be suggested that it is not certain that A display prompting the player to perform an input operation (for example, a display of a button image simulating an operation button or a text display of "press!") and a specific operation effect that can be executed thereafter are under a situation in which the design is a reach mode It may be executed, or may be executed under the condition that the design is temporarily stopped in the disengagement mode or the winning mode. When the specific operation effect is executed in a situation where the symbol is temporarily stopped in the disengagement mode, it may be a resurrection effect or a relief effect that is a big hit after making the user think that the symbol is disengaged. When the revival effect or the relief effect is executed, the symbols in the temporarily stopped state may be accompanied by a pseudo continuous change that is changed again thereafter. That is, when the specific operation effect is executed under the situation where the symbol is temporarily stopped in the disengagement mode, a pseudo continuous variation in which the symbol in the temporarily stopped state is changed again thereafter may be performed. Further, when the specific operation effect is executed under the condition of being temporarily stopped in the winning manner, the promotion effect may be promoted to a more advantageous type of big hit. The promotion effect may be, for example, promotion from a symbol type or symbol combination that suggests a big hit without a certainty change to a symbol type or symbol combination that suggests a big hit with a certainty change, or a real round of a special game that is transferred after a big hit. It may be promotion to a symbol type or symbol combination that suggests a larger jackpot. The specific operation effect may be an effect that does not involve the operation of the movable accessory. The specific operation effect may be started in response to the player's input operation, or may be started regardless of the player's input operation. The specific operation effect may be skipped when the player's input operation is not performed, or may be executed even when the player's input operation is not performed.

As the expectation suggesting effect, the changing object change effect that changes the display mode of the fluctuating object that suggests the jackpot expectation degree related to the change, and the display mode of the hold object that suggests the jackpot expectation degree related to the hold change An example is a hold change effect. In this specification, both the change effect of the variable object and the change effect of the hold object may be collectively referred to as "hold change effect". The variable object and the hold object are spherical object images displayed in the lower center of the screen or the like. The hold object is an object image for demonstratively showing the number of held lottery values to be held in the special figure holding means, and the same number of spherical object images (holding ball images) as the number of holdings are displayed, and the holding ball image is displayed. The number of reservations is indicated by the number displayed. The variable object is an object image having a display mode similar to or similar to the hold object, but is displayed larger than the hold object or the display area of the hold object so that the difference from the hold object can be seen at a glance. It may be displayed in a different position. The change object or the hold object further indicates the jackpot expectation degree related to the change or the hold depending on the display mode. For example, the display color of the display image of the variable object or the hold object, the display wording, and the additional decorative display such as the aura image or the character image suggests the jackpot expectation degree related to the change or the hold. In the hold change effect, the display of the object is changed from the display mode with a relatively low expectation to the display mode with a high expectation, and the jackpot expectation related to the change or the hold is changed depending on the change of the display mode and the changed display mode. It is suggested to be high.

Further, as the expectation suggestion effect by prefetching, there is a chance chance effect that the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the symbol variation before the symbol variation related to the lottery value to be prefetched is an odd number or even number combination or a combination of the same color symbols. Be done. For example, it is suggested that there is a low expectation due to the even-numbered symbol combination chance, the blue symbol-combined chance eye, etc., while the odd-numbered symbol combination chance, the red symbol-combination chance eye, etc. have a high expectation degree. Is suggested.

Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed with high frequency in the symbol fluctuations in which the number of symbol fluctuations is within a predetermined number, and may be executed in low frequency in the symbol fluctuations in which the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds the predetermined number. On the contrary, such notice effect or look-ahead effect, for example, is executed at a low frequency in the symbol fluctuations in which the number of symbol fluctuations is within a predetermined number, and is executed at a high frequency in the symbol fluctuations in which the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds the predetermined number. Good.

The expectation suggesting effect may have different execution frequencies depending on whether the specific variation pattern is selected or not. For example, when the notification variation pattern is selected, the announcement effect or the look-ahead effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit are executed at a low frequency or not executed at all, while the notification variation pattern is not selected. In this case, the notice effect or the look-ahead effect indicating the expectation of a big hit may be executed more frequently than when the notification variation pattern is selected. On the contrary, when the notification variation pattern is selected, the notice effect or the look-ahead effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit is frequently executed, while when the notification variation pattern is not selected, the expectation of a big hit. The notice effect or the look-ahead effect that suggests may be executed at a lower frequency than when the notification variation pattern is selected. Further, the execution frequency of the advance notice effect or the prefetch effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit may be different depending on whether or not the above-mentioned ultra-fast fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, when a super-fast fluctuation pattern is selected, a notice effect or a look-ahead effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit is executed at low frequency, while when a super-fast fluctuation pattern is not selected, it suggests a degree of expectation of a big hit. The notice effect and the look-ahead effect may be executed frequently. In addition, the execution frequency of the expectation suggestion effect may be changed according to the selection tendency of the change pattern. For example, when the change pattern is determined based on a specific change pattern selection criterion, the execution frequency of the expectation suggestion effect Is relatively high, and when the variation pattern is determined based on another variation pattern selection criterion, the frequency of execution of the expected suggestion effect may be relatively low.

After the special game is transitioned to the probability variation state and easy entry state, after the special game is finished before the number of symbol variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number, if the result of the winning/judgment judgment is a big hit or to the normal probability state If a fall determination to the effect of falling is made, the special symbol indicating that it will be a big hit is started to change before the start of fluctuation of the special symbol or the fluctuation of the special symbol is started to change after the fall judgment, When the normal symbol that indicates that the result of the operation of the ball entry variation mechanism is a hit is displayed during variation display of the special symbol, if the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, the entry variation mechanism is relatively long after the stop display of the ordinary symbol. It may operate for one operating time. On the other hand, after the special game is finished, the state is changed to the probability varying state and the easy entry state, and the variation of the special symbol after the special game is the predetermined number while the probability varying state and the easy entry state is reached. When the result is a big hit or when a fall decision to fall to a normal probability state is made, the special symbol indicating that it is a big hit starts changing before or after the change of the special symbol Normal symbol is started to fluctuate before the start of fluctuation, and the normal symbol indicating that the result of the operation determination of the ball entry fluctuation mechanism is a hit during the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol stop display After that, the ball entry variation mechanism may operate for a second operation time shorter than the first operation time. In other words, regardless of the game state at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol to be hit, depending on whether the game state at the time of the stop display of the normal symbol is the easy entry state or the normal entry state, the result is a win. The operation time of the ball entry variation mechanism that normally operates after the stop display of the symbol may be different.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed, the special game is always shifted to the probability variation state after the special game, and the second special symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed. In this case, after the special game, the state may be always changed to the probability changing state. That is, the probability variation 100% may be provided in which only the probability variation jackpot is prepared as the jackpot type of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this configuration, the number of symbol fluctuations is a predetermined number (100 times) Depending on whether or not a specific effect is executed in the symbol fluctuation, the probability fluctuation state exceeds the predetermined number (after 101 times) by the symbol fluctuations. A confirmation notification may be made as to whether or not is continued. For example, a notification effect that confirms and informs that the probability variation state will continue may be executed according to the operation of the effect button 109, and an image simulating the effect button 109 for prompting the player to perform the button operation may be displayed. Displaying before execution may definitively suggest that the stochastic state continues. In other words, when the number of symbol fluctuations falls to a predetermined number (100 times), a fall determination to fall to the normal probability state is made, and when the number of symbol fluctuations falls to a predetermined number (100 times) In addition, it is possible not to display an image simulating the effect button 109 due to the predetermined number of symbol variations. Even when the fall determination to fall to the normal probability state is made by the time the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100 times), the symbol variation in which the number of symbol fluctuations reaches the predetermined number (100 times) In the case of a big hit, an image that imitates the effect button 109 may be displayed with the predetermined number of symbol variations, and a notification effect for confirming that the big button will be hit after the operation of the effect button 109 may be executable.

In the configuration in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are set to 100% probability variation, a plurality of effect modes having different effect tendencies at the time of symbol variation are prepared, and one of the plurality of effect modes can be selected according to the operation of the player. May be configured as. Depending on which of the plurality of effect modes is selected, the effect tendency and the execution frequency of the above-mentioned expectation suggestion effect may be different. For example, three effect modes of A, B, and C are prepared, the suggestion accuracy and the suggestion frequency are high in the effect mode A, the suggestion accuracy and the suggestion frequency are medium in the effect mode B, and the suggestion accuracy and the suggestion accuracy are in the effect mode C. The suggestion frequency may be low. In the case of the effect mode A, the expectation suggesting effect that indicates that the jackpot will be a big hit when the symbols change and the lottery value corresponding to the big hit is held is executed at high frequency. On the other hand, in the case of the effect mode C, the expectation suggesting effect suggesting that the jackpot will be a big hit is rarely executed or not executed at all even when the design variation of the big hit or the lottery value corresponding to the big hit is held. . In the effect mode B, a balance type effect that is located between the effect modes A and C is executed, and, for example, the expectation suggestion effect is executed with a frequency and reliability relatively lower than those in the effect mode A.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol is a big hit and a special game is executed, the special game is shifted to a probability variation state or a normal probability state after the special game, while the second special symbol is a big hit and a special game. When is executed, the probability variation state may be always entered after the special game. In this case, whether or not to shift to the probability varying state may be determined depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area in the special winning opening which is opened during the special game after the big hit. That is, it may be a configuration called "ball certainty" or "V certainty" in which the transition to the probability varying state is confirmed by a ball (V winning) to a specific area during the special game. As a special winning opening that can be opened during a special game, a first special winning opening in which no specific area is provided in the special winning opening and a second special winning opening in which a specific area is provided in the special winning opening are provided. A first unit game in which the first special winning opening is opened and a second unit game in which the second special winning opening is opened may be executed during one special game. In this case, it is possible to execute the second unit game in which the opening mode and the opening time of the second special winning opening are different according to the type of the big hit symbol, and it is possible to execute the second unit game in which the ease of entering a specific area is different. Therefore, the transition probability to the probability variation state may be different depending on the type of the big hit symbol. For example, when a special game is executed with a big hit pattern A, a second unit game in which the opening time of the second special winning opening is relatively long is executed, and it becomes easy to enter a specific area. You may do it. On the other hand, when a special game is executed with a big hit pattern B, a second unit game in which the opening time of the second special winning opening is relatively short is executed, and it is difficult to enter a specific area. It may be. In addition, by changing the opening timing of the special winning opening and the operation timing of the distribution mechanism for distributing the game balls to either the specific area or the non-specific area within the special winning opening, depending on the type of the big hit symbol, A special game (big hit symbol A) or a special game in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the special region may be executed. In addition, only the special winning opening provided with the specific area is provided, and the distribution mechanism for distributing the game balls to the specific area or the non-specific area in the specific number of unit games (for example, the fourth round) is operated. , By specializing the operation mode according to the type of the big hit symbol, a special game in which it is easy or possible to enter the specific area (big hit symbol A, the distribution time value that allows the player to enter the specific area is 10). Seconds) and a special game in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area (big hit symbol B, the distribution time value that allows entry into the specific area is 0.05 seconds) Good.

In the above-mentioned "V certainty" configuration, the execution mode of the second unit game when the first special symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed, and the second special symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed. By changing the execution mode of the second unit game in the case of playing, the transition probability to the probability varying state may be different. For example, when the first special symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed, the opening time of the second special winning opening in the second unit game is made relatively short and the entry to the specific area is relatively made. While making it difficult, when the second special symbol is a big hit and a special game is executed, the opening time of the second special winning opening in the second unit game is relatively lengthened to a specific area. You may make it relatively easy to enter the ball. To give a specific example, when the first special symbol is a big hit and a special game is executed, the probability of entering a specific area in the second special winning opening is about 50%, while the second special The probability of entering the second special winning opening may be about 80% when the special game is executed when the symbol is a big hit. In addition, when the second special symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed, the opening time of the second special winning opening in the second unit game is lengthened (for example, 5 seconds or more, 10 seconds or more, or 20 seconds or more). By doing so, the second unit game may be configured so as to almost certainly enter the second special winning opening if the game ball is shot toward the second special winning opening during the special game. Thereby, when the second special symbol is a big hit and a special game is executed, the probability of entering a specific area in the second special winning opening may be substantially 100%. That is, the probability of transition to the probability variation state when the second special symbol is a big hit may be substantially 100%. In this case, the transition probability to the probability variation state when the first special symbol is a big hit may be less than 100%, and the transition probability to the probability variation state when the first special symbol is a big hit is 50%. It may be about 80%. That is, in the configuration of "V certainty", the special figure 1 may be set to less than 100%, and the special figure 2 may be set to 100%.

In the configuration in which the special figure 1 is less than 100% probability variation and the special figure 2 is 100% probability variation, a plurality of effect modes having different effect tendencies at the time of a pattern change during the normal game are prepared, and a plurality of effect modes are provided according to the operation of the player. It may be configured to be able to select any of the effect modes of. As an effect mode, a common effect is executed by the symbol variation until the number of symbol variations after the special game reaches a specific number (for example, 20 times), and the symbol variations exceeding the specific number (for example, after 21 times) are mutually changed. A plurality of specific effect modes in which different effects can be executed may be prepared. Furthermore, a special effect mode different from the plurality of specific effect modes may be prepared. In the special effect mode, an effect different from the above-described common effect may be executable by the symbol fluctuation until the number of symbol fluctuations after the special game reaches a specific number (for example, 20 times). Further, the player may be allowed to select any one of the plurality of characters in the same effect mode, and the effect contents may be different depending on the selected character.

In the configuration in which the special figure 1 is less than 100% of probability variation and the special figure 2 is 100% of probability variation, it suggests whether or not the probability variation state executed by the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations becomes a predetermined number (100 times) can be continued. The rendering tendency of the continuous rendering may be different depending on the rendering mode. For example, in the first effect mode, a notification effect that definitely notifies whether or not the probability variation state can be continued is executed, while in the second effect mode, an expectation suggestion effect that indicates the continuation expectation degree of the probability variation state is executed. You may do it. Depending on the effect mode, the effect tendency of the variable effect executed by the symbol fluctuation in which the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds the predetermined number (after 101 times) may be different. In this case, in the effect mode in which the effect of the variation effect executed by the symbol variation in which the number of times of the symbol variation is within the predetermined number and the variation effect performed in the symbol variation effect in which the number of the number of the symbol changes exceeds the predetermined number are the same They may be common and different in different effect modes. Furthermore, if the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (101 times or more) and it becomes a big hit, or if a fall determination to fall to a normal probability state is made, the symbol fluctuation is a predetermined number (100 times). The same effect as the change effect (that is, the notification effect or the expectation suggestion effect) executed by the symbol change may be executed. In this case, if the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (101 times or more), it becomes a big hit, or if a fall judgment is made to fall to a normal probability state, and the symbol fluctuation is a predetermined number. The variation effect executed by the symbol variation of (100 times) may be common in the same effect mode, and may be different in different effect modes.

In the configuration where the special figure 1 is less than 100% of the probability variation and the special figure 2 is 100% of the probability variation, whether or not to fall to the normal probability state by the symbol variation before the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (100 times) The suggested falling effect may be executed. This fall production may be a battle production in which an ally character and an enemy character battle, and the degree of expectation is suggested according to the battle result, and defeated in the battle before the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (100 times). A fall to the normal probability state may be suggested when the defeat effect is performed. It should be noted that a revival effect that suggests the possibility that the ally character may revive after the battle is defeated may be executed, and that the probability variation state may continue due to the execution of the revival effect. On the other hand, if the revival effect is not executed before the number of symbol fluctuations after the battle is defeated reaches a specific number (for example, 5 times, 10 times), it may be definitely notified that the state has fallen to the normal probability state. The defeat effect and the revival effect may be executed multiple times before the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (100 times), and for example, an effect that fuels whether or not to fall due to a flow of defeat, revival, defeat, revival, etc. It may be executed.

In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed, the special game is transitioned to the probability variation state or the normal probability state after the special game, and the second special symbol is a big hit and the special game is performed. Even when is executed, the probability variation state or the normal probability state may be entered after the special game. That is, the probability variation big hit and the non-probability variation big hit are prepared as the big hit types of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the probability variation may be less than 100%. In addition, the probability of transitioning to the probability variation state after a big game is executed and a special game is executed may be common in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or the special figure 2 is more preferable than the special figure 1. It may be high. For example, in the above-mentioned "V certainty" configuration, the probability that the special figure 1 is changed to the probability variation state after the big hit is 50% and the special figure 2 is changed to the probability variation state is the big hit. May be 80%. In this configuration, the number of symbol fluctuations is a predetermined number (100 times) Depending on whether or not a specific effect is executed in the symbol fluctuation, the probability fluctuation state exceeds the predetermined number (after 101 times) by the symbol fluctuations. The degree of expectation that the will continue may be suggested. For example, a specific operation effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability variation state continues may be executed according to the operation of the effect button 109, and a plurality of times (eg, for example, in the symbol change in which the number of symbol changes is a predetermined number (100 times) It may be possible to execute the specific operation effect twice), and a high degree of expectation that the probability variation state continues may be suggested in accordance with the suggestion contents of the specific operation effect a plurality of times. In this case, a notification effect for confirming that the probability variation state continues in any of the plurality of specific operation effects may be executed, or the probability variation state continues in any of the plurality of specific operation effects. The fact does not need to be confirmed. In the latter case, it may be suggested that the degree of expectation that the stochastic state will continue is relatively low.

In the configuration where the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are less than 100% of probability variation, the number of symbol fluctuations after the special game becomes a predetermined number (100th time), depending on the effect contents at the time of symbol variation, the number of symbol fluctuations is a predetermined number. It may be suggested that the fall determination to fall is made within the symbol variation within (1 to 100 times). For example, depending on whether the battle effect in the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number (100th time) is victory, continuation of battle, or defeat, the possibility of whether or not the player has already fallen is different. Good. For example, if it is impossible to determine whether or not the player has already fallen if he or she wins the battle, it may be suggested that the number of symbol fluctuations becomes a predetermined number (the 100th time), and the symbol fluctuation will be a big hit. . When the battle continues, it may be suggested that the fall determination to fall is not made. If the player loses the battle, it is already determined that he/she should fall, and it may be suggested that the game state has fallen to the normal probability state. In this configuration, the number of symbol fluctuations after the special game exceeds a predetermined number (101 times or more) in the symbol fluctuation, and if the probability variation state and the easy-to-enter state continue, the selection tendency of the variation pattern in the symbol variation exceeding the predetermined number May be changed. For example, the change speed may be changed to a change pattern selection criterion that enables selection of a super-speed change pattern having a very short change time, and the change efficiency of the pattern change exceeding a predetermined number (after 101 times) may be further improved.

(Example 2: Limit type)
In the present embodiment, an upper limit is set for the number of times (so-called number of consecutive holidays) in which a probability variation big hit that can shift to the probability varying state after the special game is continuously generated. When the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the probability variation state, and the probability variation big hit symbol that does not trigger the limit is displayed (that is, before reaching the limit), after the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed After the special game to be executed is completed, the state is changed to the probability varying state. On the other hand, if the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the probability variation state, and if the probability variation big hit symbol that triggers the limit is reached (that is, after reaching the limit), the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. After the end of the special game executed later, the normal probability state is entered. The upper limit number of times reaching the limit is set for the cumulative number of times the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the probability variation continuation from the transition from the normal probability state to the probability variation state to the next transition to the normal probability state. Then, the limit is reached when the cumulative number of times the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the probability variation continuation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 6 times). When the limit is reached, that is, when the cumulative number of stop display of the probability variation big hit symbol during the probability variation continuation becomes a predetermined number (for example, 6 times), it is executed after the stop variation display of the probability variation big hit symbol whose cumulative number becomes the predetermined number. After the end of the special game, it is forcibly transferred to the normal probability state. On the other hand, if the cumulative number of times the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the probability variation continuation is less than a predetermined number (for example, 5 times or less), the limit is not reached. If it is before reaching the limit, that is, if the cumulative number of stop display of the probability variation big hit symbol during the probability variation continuation is less than a predetermined number (for example, 5 times or less), the stop display of the probability variation big hit symbol whose cumulative number is less than the predetermined number. After the end of the special game executed later, the state is changed to the probability varying state. In addition, when the state is shifted to the normal probability state, the count of the cumulative number of probability variation big hit symbols related to the limit is reset. An example of the jackpot probability in the present embodiment is about 1/120 to 1/160 in the normal probability state (low probability state) and about 1/30 to 1/40 in the probability fluctuation state (high probability state).

In this embodiment, when the state is changed to the probability varying state after the end of the special game, the state is changed to the probability varying state and the easy entry state. Therefore, in the probability variation state, the game ball is entered toward the second starting opening 12 in which the easiness of entering the ball is increased, and the second special symbol becomes a big hit game property. At this time, only the probability variation big hit is prepared as the big hit type of the second special symbol, and the special figure 2 may have a probability variation of 100%. In this case, if the normal probability state is changed to the probability variation state, it is always changed to the probability variation state after the special game is executed until the limit is reached, and it is always changed to the normal probability state after the special game is executed when the limit is reached. Becomes As a result, the continuation of the probability fluctuation state is guaranteed up to the upper limit number at which the limit is reached. In the limit type, while the probability variation state continues until the next big hit, the end of a predetermined number of times may be set for the easy entry state. As a result, when the end of the easy entry state is reached, the probability variation state (high probability) and normal entry state (low entry) are triggered by the start of the next symbol variation of the number of symbol variations (100 times, for example) at the end. Sphere) will be transferred.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to prepare a probability variation big hit and a non-probability variation big hit as the big hit type of the second special symbol, and the special figure 2 may be configured to have less than 100% probability variation. For example, as a type of symbol indicating that the second special symbol is a big hit, a probability variation big hit symbol (first jackpot symbol) and a non-probability variation jackpot symbol (second jackpot symbol) are prepared, and a stop display of the first jackpot symbol. It may be possible to shift to the probability variation state after the end of the special game to be executed later, and it may be possible to shift to the normal probability state after the end of the special game to be executed after the stop display of the second big hit symbol. In this case, when the first big hit symbol that triggers reaching the limit is stopped and displayed, it is shifted to the normal probability state after the special game, while when the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed before reaching the limit, it is special. After the game, the state is changed to the probability changing state. In other words, if the cumulative number of times the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed reaches a predetermined number during the probability change from the transition from the normal probability state to the probability variation state to the next transition to the normal probability state, the cumulative number of times Reaches a predetermined number (reaches the limit), after the special game executed after the stop display of the first big hit symbol, the normal probability state is entered. On the other hand, if the cumulative number of times the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the probability variation continuation is less than the predetermined number, the cumulative number is less than the predetermined number (before the limit is reached). After the special game is finished, the state is changed to the probability varying state. When the second big hit symbol is stopped and displayed while the probability variation continues, the normal probability state is entered regardless of the cumulative number of times the first big hit symbol has been stopped and displayed. Therefore, after reaching the limit, the state is always shifted to the normal probability state after execution of the special game, but even before reaching the limit, there is a possibility that the state is shifted to the normal probability state after execution of the special game.

In a configuration in which the special figure 2 has a probability variation of less than 100%, the probability variation transition probabilities of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be the same. That is, the probability that the first special symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed and then the probability is changed, and the second special symbol is the big hit and the special game is executed and then the probability is changed. May be the same. In this case, there is a first definite strange big hit symbol and a first non-probable variation big hit symbol as the type of symbol indicating that the first special symbol is a big hit, and a second type as a symbol type indicating that the special symbol is a big hit. There may be two probability variation big hit symbols and a second non-determination variation jackpot pattern.

In a configuration in which the special figure 2 has a probability variation of less than 100%, the probability variation transition probabilities of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be different. For example, the probability variation transition probability of Toku-zu 1 may be 50%, and the probability variation transition probability of Toku-zu 2 may be 80%. In this case, the “V accuracy” configuration described in the first embodiment may be adopted. For example, in the case of a big hit in the special figure 1, a second unit game in which it is difficult to enter the specific area by opening the second special winning opening provided with the specific area for a relatively short time is included. The special game may be executed, and the probability change transition probability may be relatively low. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the special figure 2, a second unit game in which it is easy to enter the specific area by opening the second special winning opening provided with the specific area for a relatively long time is included. The special game may be executed so that the probability change transition probability may be relatively high.

In this embodiment, the fall determination described in the first embodiment may be combined. For example, the probability change transition probabilities of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 are set to 100%, and a fall determination may be made to determine whether or not to shift to the normal probability state for each symbol variation after transition to the probability variation state. .. In this configuration, after the transition from the normal probability state to the stochastic fluctuation state, if the cumulative number of jackpots reaches a predetermined number without making a single fall determination to fall to the normal probability state, the cumulative number of times reaches a predetermined number. After the special game executed after the stop display of the big hit symbols reaching the number, the normal probability state is entered. When the fall judgment to fall to the normal probability state is made in the probability variation state, the symbol variation related to the fall determination is started regardless of the cumulative number of times the big hit symbol (probability variation big hit symbol) until then is stopped and displayed. When transitioning to the normal probability state. In the configuration in which the limit and the fall are combined, the probability change transition probability of at least one of special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be less than 100%. In the specification that combines limit and fall (limit and fall type), the probability fluctuation state continues until the fall decision is made to fall or until the next big hit, while the easy entry state is set to the end of a predetermined number of times. Sometimes. As a result, when the end of the easy-to-enter state is reached without making a fall determination to drop the probability, the probability variation state (high Probability) and normal ball entry (low ball entry).

Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 are 100% probability variation, and in a configuration in which the limit and the fall are combined, it may be possible to shift to the easy-entry state after a special game is executed with a big hit in Toku-zu 1 . For example, in the normal entry state, after the special game becomes a big hit in the special figure 1 (so-called first hit), it may be always shifted to the easy entry state. Depending on the condition, the continuation condition of the easy entry state may be different. For example, if the special figure 1 is a big hit in the normal entry state, as the type of big hit symbol of the special figure 1, the number of symbol fluctuations at the end of the easy entry state is relatively small (for example, 1 time, 9 times). There may be a big hit symbol A and a big hit symbol B having a relatively large number of symbol fluctuations at the end of the easy entry state (for example, 100 times). The jackpot pattern A is a plurality of types of jackpot symbols (eg, jackpot symbol A1, jackpot symbol A2, jackpot symbol) corresponding to a plurality of symbol fluctuation times (eg, 1, 9 and 18 times) at the end of the easy entry state. A3) is preferred. When the special figure 2 is a big hit in the easy-to-ball-in state, the number of symbol fluctuations at the end may be relatively large (for example, 100 times or continue to the next big-spot). For example, in the normal ball entry state, the number of symbol fluctuations that is the end after the first hit in the special figure 1 is relatively small (for example, 1 time, 9 times, 18 times). If a big hit in the special figure 2 by the end of the ball easy state, the number of symbol fluctuations at the end is relatively large (at least 100 times). When special figure 1 or special figure 2 is a big hit and the number of symbol fluctuations that is the end is relatively large (for example, 100 times) when it is transitioned to the easy entry state, then it falls from the probability variation state to the normal probability state The easy-to-enter state may be continued until a fall determination to the effect is made. That is, as described in the above-described first embodiment, there is no fall to the effect of falling until a symbol variation of a predetermined number of symbol variations that can be the end of the easy entry state, and thereafter the number of symbol variations is When a fall to the effect of falling due to a design change exceeding a predetermined number (for example, after 101 times) is made, a high probability and a low probability from a high entry state when the design change related to the fall determination is started. In addition, the low ball entry state may be entered. In addition, when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is a big hit and the limit is reached, when the number of symbol fluctuations at the end is relatively large (for example, 100 times), the state is changed to an easy entry state, It is possible to shift to a low probability and high entry state in which the number of symbol fluctuations, which is the end of the entry state, is fixed. That is, after the special game that is executed after the big hit symbol that triggers reaching the limit is stopped and displayed, the state may be shifted to a low probability and high entry state where the end of the easy entry state is 100 times. .

Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 are 100% probability variation, and in the structure where the limit and the fall are combined, when the big hit in the Toku-zu 1 (a so-called first hit) in the normal ball entering state, when the big hit pattern of Toku-zu 1 Depending on the type, the final number of symbol fluctuations may be relatively small (for example, 1 time, 9 times, 18 times), and the state may be shifted to the easy entry state or the normal entry state. As another example, in the case of a big hit (so-called first hit) in the special figure 1 in the normal incoming state, the number of symbol fluctuations at the end is relatively large depending on the type of the big hit symbol in the special figure 1 (for example, The game may be transitioned to the easy-to-enter state 100 times or to continue until the next big hit) or the normal-entering state (a state that is not the easy-to-enter state). As yet another example, when the special figure 1 is a big hit (so-called first hit) in the normal ball entering state, the number of symbol fluctuations at the end is relatively large depending on the type of the big hit symbol of the special figure 1 ( For example, it may be shifted to an easy-to-enter state where the number of times of symbol variation is relatively small (for example, 1 time, 9 times, or 18 times).

In the present embodiment, the expected degree of transition to the easy-to-enter state may be suggested by the effect during the symbol change in which the special figure 1 is a big hit (so-called first hit) in the normal-entry state. If it is determined whether or not to shift to the easy entry state according to the type of big hit symbol, depending on the effect contents displayed on the effect display device during the symbol change related to the big hit, at the time of stopping the symbol change related to the big hit There is a possibility that the type of jackpot pattern will be different. For example, there are at least a first big hit symbol (big hit symbol C) and a second big hit symbol (big hit symbol D) as the types of big hit symbols in the special figure 1, and the first big hit symbol (in a normal probability state and a normal incoming state). After the special game executed after the stop display of the big hit pattern C), it is possible to shift to the easy entry state, and after the stop display of the second big hit symbol (big hit pattern D) in the normal probability state and the normal entry state, it is executed. In the case of shifting to the normal entry state after the end of the special game, the special jackpot 1 is a big hit. The first jackpot symbol (big jackpot symbol C) and The possibility of which one of the two big hit symbols (big hit symbol D) is stopped and displayed may be different. As the effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the possibility of shifting to the easy-to-enter state, the expectation suggesting effect described in the first embodiment may be executed, and the degree of expectation suggested by the expecting degree suggesting effect is high. Depending on, the possibility of which one of the first big hit symbol (big hit symbol C) and the second big hit symbol (big hit symbol D) is stopped and displayed may be different. In addition, depending on the contents of the look-ahead effect that is executed in the symbol change before the symbol change related to the big hit, not by using the effect that is executed during the change in the symbol that becomes the big hit Thus, the possibility of which one of the first big hit symbol (big hit symbol C) and the second big hit symbol (big hit symbol D) is stopped and displayed may be different. The prefetch effect executed in this case may be the expectation suggestion effect described in the first embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 is a big hit in the normal ball entering state, and the number of symbol fluctuations at the end is relatively large (or continues until the next big hit) in accordance with the effect during the symbol fluctuation, which is a big hit. The degree of expectation of transitioning to the state may be suggested. For example, there are at least a first big hit symbol (big hit symbol E) and a second big hit symbol (big hit symbol F) as the types of big hit symbols of special figure 1, and the first big hit symbol (in a normal probability state and in a normal incoming state) ( After the special game executed after the stop display of the big hit symbol E), the number of symbol fluctuations that is the end after the end of the special game is relatively large (or continues until the next big hit) It is possible to shift to the easy entry state, and the normal probability state and In the normal entry state, the number of symbol fluctuations that is the end after the special game executed after the stop display of the second big hit symbol (big hit symbol F) is relatively small (or does not continue until the next big hit) Easy to enter In the case of shifting to the state, according to the effect contents during the symbol change that the special figure 1 is a big hit, the first big hit symbol (big hit symbol E) and the second big hit symbol (big hit symbol F) in the symbol change. The possibility of which is stopped and displayed may be different. As an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the possibility of transitioning to the easy-to-enter state where the number of symbol fluctuations at the end is relatively large (or continues until the next big hit), the degree-of-expectation suggesting effect described in Example 1 above. May be executed, and either the first big hit symbol (big hit symbol E) or the second big hit symbol (big hit symbol F) is stopped and displayed according to the high degree of expectation suggested by the expectation suggesting effect. The possibilities may differ. In addition, depending on the contents of the look-ahead effect that is executed in the symbol change before the symbol change related to the big hit, not by using the effect that is executed during the change in the symbol that becomes the big hit Thus, the possibility of which one of the first big hit symbol (big hit symbol E) and the second big hit symbol (big hit symbol F) is stopped and displayed may be different. The prefetch effect executed in this case may be the expectation suggestion effect described in the first embodiment.

In the present embodiment, in the case of a high probability and a low ball entry state, when a special game is executed and a special game is executed and then the state is changed to the easy entry state, depending on whether or not the big hit will reach the limit, The end of the transitionable easy state may be different. In other words, when a specific big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in a high probability and low ball entry state, the cumulative number of times the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the probability variation continuation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 6 times) Depending on whether or not it is displayed, the end of the easy entry state may be changed thereafter. For example, if you are a big jackpot with a particular jackpot design and you do not reach the limit, after transitioning to a high-probability and high-ball entry state after execution of a special game after the jackpot, you also have a high-probability and high-ball entry. The state may continue until the next big hit. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit with the same specific big hit symbol, if the limit is reached, it will be transitioned to a low probability and high entry state after the execution of the special game after the big hit, and the high entry state A predetermined number of symbol fluctuations (for example, 100 times) may be set as the end period. In other words, if you reach the limit with a big jackpot pattern and reach the limit after the special game ends, you enter until the number of symbol changes after the special game reaches 100 times. The easy ball state continues, and the number of symbol variations after the special game is 101 times, and the normal ball entry state occurs due to the symbol variation. The transition timing from the easy entry state to the normal entry state at this time may be triggered by the start of the 100th symbol variation, or by the end of the 100th symbol variation, or the 101st symbol. It may be just before the start of fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, in the case of a high probability and a high ball entry state, when a special game is executed and a special game is executed, and then the state is transitioned to an easy-to-enter state, depending on whether or not the big hit will reach the limit, The end of the transitionable easy state may be different. In other words, when a specific big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in a high probability and high entry state, the cumulative number of times the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the probability variation continuation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 6 times) Depending on whether or not it is displayed, the end of the easy entry state may be different thereafter. For example, if you are a big hit with a particular big hit symbol and you do not reach the limit, after transitioning to a high probability and high entry state after the execution of the special game after the big hit, high probability and high entry The state may continue until the next big hit. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit with the same specific big hit symbol, if the limit is reached, it will be transitioned to a low probability and high entry state after the execution of the special game after the big hit, and the high entry state A predetermined number of symbol fluctuations (for example, 100 times) may be set as the end period. In other words, if you reach the limit with a big jackpot pattern and reach the limit after the special game ends, you enter until the number of symbol changes after the special game reaches 100 times. The easy ball state continues, and the number of symbol variations after the special game is 101 times, and the normal ball entry state occurs due to the symbol variation. The transition timing from the easy entry state to the normal entry state at this time may be triggered by the start of the 100th symbol variation, or by the end of the 100th symbol variation, or the 101st symbol. It may be just before the start of fluctuation.

Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 are 100% probability variation, and in a configuration in which the limit and the fall are combined, if the state changes to the probability varying state and the easy entry state after the end of the special game, then it falls to the normal probability A specific effect mode having a common effect tendency may be prepared irrespective of which symbol change number of times the change determination is made. Furthermore, as long as the easy-to-enter state continues, a specific performance mode that has a common performance tendency regardless of whether the probability fluctuation state continues or the transition is made to the normal probability state due to a fall determination. May be prepared. When the special game mode is entered and the player enters the special production mode after entering the probability variation state after the special game is finished, a rush production is displayed to indicate that the special production mode will be entered in the end demonstration of the special game. You may. In the ending demonstration of the special game, the rush effect may be executable in a plurality of display modes, and the difference in the display mode of the rush effect may suggest a continuation condition for the subsequent easy entry state. For example, a plurality of symbol fluctuations that can be the end of the easy entry state when entering a particular effect mode (for example, 1 time, 9 times, 18 times, 100 times and continue until the next big hit) are prepared, and easy entry The degree of expectation of the end of the state may be suggested by the display mode of the inrush effect. For example, when the number of end times in the easy-to-enter state is 1, 9, or 18 times, the inrush effect is displayed in which the wording of "effect mode A inrush!" is displayed, and the display color of the wording is displayed. It may be possible to indicate which is the final number of times of the easy entry state by. For example, there are blue letters and red letters as the wording of the entry effect, and the red letters may have a higher possibility that the number of ending times in the easy entry state is 18 times than the blue letters. On the other hand, when the number of ending times in the easy-to-enter state is 100 times or when the easy-to-enter state continues until the next big hit, the inrush effect is displayed in which the phrase “production mode B rush!!” is displayed. The display color of the wording may be able to indicate whether or not there is an end to the easy entry state. For example, there are blue letters and red letters as the wording of the entry effect, and the red letters may be more likely to continue the easy entry state until the next big hit than the blue letters. In addition, a continuation effect may be executed that fuels whether or not the easy-to-enter state continues in the symbol variation number of times that the symbol can be changed to the end of the easy-to-enter state (for example, 1, 9, or 18 times). For example, if it is the first time symbol change, it is possible to execute a continuous effect that encourages whether the easy entry state (that is, the effect mode A) ends once, or continues nine times or more, and the ninth time symbol change. In that case, a continuous effect can be executed that fuels whether the easy-to-enter state (that is, the effect mode A) is finished 9 times or continued 18 times or more. Further, if it is the 18th symbol variation, whether the easy entry state ends at 18 times and the production mode A ends, or the production mode B is entered and the easy entry state continues for 100 times or more. It is possible to carry out continuous production that fuels. Furthermore, the expectation of continuation of the easy entry state (that is, by the difference in the display mode of the continuous effect executed for the number of symbol variations that can be the end of the easy entry state (for example, 1 time, 9 times or 18 times) (The possibility of the end of the easy entry state). Furthermore, whether or not the current game state is the probability variation state may be suggested by the difference in the display mode of the continuous effect. That is, it may be suggested whether or not the fall determination to fall to the normal probability state has already been made depending on the difference in the display mode of the continuous effect.

In the present embodiment, it may be possible to notify the remaining number of probability variation big hits until reaching the limit. For example, when the cumulative number of jackpots during the probability variation from the transition from the normal probability state to the probability variation state to the next transition to the normal probability state is limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16 times), the probability variation continues. The number of times (for example, 14 times) obtained by subtracting the present cumulative number of times of jackpots (for example, 2 times) from the predetermined number (for example, 16 times) can be notified as the remaining number of times. In this case, immediately after the transition from the normal probability state to the probability fluctuation state, a predetermined number that is the upper limit (for example, 16 times) is notified as the remaining number of times, and the remaining number is reached immediately before the occurrence of the big hit when the cumulative number of times reaching the limit reaches the predetermined number. The number of times will be once. The remaining number of times until reaching the limit may be informed during the fluctuation of the symbol during the normal game, may be constantly displayed on the effect display device during the normal game, or the player may press the effect button during the normal game. It may be displayed by operating. In addition, it may be notified during execution of the special game, may be constantly displayed on the effect display device during the special game, or may be displayed by the player operating the effect button during the special game. Good. The remaining number of times until reaching the limit may be notified only in a specific game state, for example, it may be notified in the easy entry state, but may not be notified in the normal entry state. For example, in the configuration in which the above limit and the fall are combined, it is possible to notify the remaining number of times until the limit is reached in a particular performance mode that plunges when the state changes to the probability varying state and the easy entry state after the end of the special game. May be. In addition, in the case of transitioning to the probability variation state and the easy entry state after the end of the special game, when the number of symbol changes at the end of the easy entry state is relatively large (for example, at least 100 times), the limit is reached It may be possible to inform the remaining number of times. As another example, it may be possible to inform the remaining number of times until the limit is reached when the special game executed as a big hit on the special figure 2 is changed to the probability varying state and the easy entry state. The notification of the remaining number of times until the limit is reached may not be definitively or explicitly reported, but may be vaguely notified to the extent that it indicates whether the remaining number is large or small. For example, when the red mark is displayed, the remaining number is relatively high (for example, 8 to 16 times), and when the blue mark is displayed, the remaining number is relatively small (for example, 8 to 16 times). (0 to 7 times).

In the present embodiment, instead of the remaining number of times until reaching the limit, whether or not the cumulative number of times reaches a predetermined number (reaches reaching the limit) in the next big hit may be notified. That is, when the remaining number of times to reach the limit is one, it is notified that it is just before reaching the limit, while when the remaining number of times to reach the limit is two or more, it is not just before reaching the limit. You may. As for the notification of whether or not it is just before the limit is reached, similar to the notification of the remaining number of times until the limit is reached, it may be possible to be notified during the change of symbols in the normal game, or it can be notified during the special game. Alternatively, the notification may be possible only in a specific game state. Specifically, it may be possible to notify whether or not it is just before the limit is reached in the easy-to-enter state, while not being notified whether or not it is just before the limit is reached in the normal-entered state. Further, instead of definitively or explicitly notifying whether or not it is just before reaching the limit, it may be vaguely suggesting whether or not there is a high possibility that it is immediately before reaching the limit. For example, when the red mark is displayed, there is a high possibility that it is not immediately before reaching the limit, and when the blue mark is displayed, it may be configured that there is a high probability that it is immediately before reaching the limit.

In the present embodiment, the limit notification effect of notifying the remaining number of times until reaching the limit or notifying whether it is just before reaching the limit is performed by the player during the normal game or the special game by the effect button 109 or the cross key 110, It may be configured to be executable when a specific input operation is performed through the lever 112. In this case, the display that urges the player to perform a specific input operation may not be performed, and only the player who knows the specific input operation may be the "back command effect" in which the limit notification effect can be executed. When it is possible to execute the limit notification effect by performing a specific input operation during the special game that is executed after the symbol fluctuation that becomes a big hit or the design that becomes a big hit, if the limit is reached by the big hit May be done. Note that instead of notifying whether or not the limit has been reached, it may be notified whether or not the probability variation state will be entered after the end of the special game. In other words, by performing a specific input operation during a symbol variation that is a big hit or during a special game that is executed after the symbol that is a big hit is stopped, it may be notified whether or not to shift to the probability varying state after the special game. . This is because if the limit is not reached, it is possible to shift to the stochastic fluctuation state, whereas if the limit is reached, it is always shifted to the normal probability state. In addition, by inputting a back command in a specific situation, it is possible to inform you of the remaining number of times until reaching the limit, whether it is just before reaching the limit, or whether it will shift to the probability fluctuation state after the end of the special game or You may make it rush into the "reverse mode" which is a production mode that can be suggested. For example, the back mode may be entered when the effect button 109 is pressed a predetermined number of times or the cross key 110 is operated in a predetermined order after operating the lever 112 during a special game. If you set the back mode once, the back mode setting may be maintained without entering the back command again until the easy entry state is completed and the normal entry state is entered. While the setting of the back mode is maintained, the above notification or suggestion may be always executable during a symbol change or a special game.

In a configuration in which at least one of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 has a probability variation of less than 100%, it indicates the degree of expectation that a probability change will occur during a symbol change that is a big hit or during a symbol change that precedes the symbol change related to a big hit. The expected degree suggesting effect may be executable. Since the probability variation is less than 100%, there are at least the probability variation jackpot pattern (first jackpot symbol) and the non-probability variation jackpot symbol (second jackpot symbol) as the type of symbol indicating that it is a big hit, and the stop display of the first jackpot symbol. It is possible to shift to the probability variation state after the end of the special game executed later, and it is possible to shift to the normal probability state after the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the second big hit symbol. When the cumulative number of times the first jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 6 times) during the probability change from the transition from the normal probability state to the probability variation state to the next transition to the normal probability state, After the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the first big hit symbol when the cumulative number of times during which the probability variation continues reaches a predetermined number (for example, 6 times), the normal probability state is entered. On the other hand, if the cumulative number of times the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the probability variation is less than the predetermined number (for example, 5 times or less), the cumulative number during the probability variation is less than the predetermined number (for example, 5 times or less). After the special game executed after the stop display of the first big hit symbol is finished, the state is shifted to the probability varying state. In this configuration, depending on whether or not the state is just before reaching the limit, the expectation degree suggesting effect suggests the degree of expectation whether or not the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and then transitioned to the probability variation state. The production tendency and the execution frequency may be different. Specifically, in the case of a state just before reaching the limit, that is, in a specific situation where the cumulative number of times the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the probability variation continuation is a number obtained by subtracting 1 from a predetermined number (for example, 5 times) Then, it is possible to execute the expectation suggestive production that suggests that the degree of expectation of transition to the stochastic fluctuation state is relatively low, and the execution frequency of the expectation suggestion production that suggests the degree of expectation of transition to the stochastic fluctuation state. Is set relatively low, or the notification effect for confirming the transition to the probability variation state is not executed. On the other hand, in the case where it is not just before reaching the limit, that is, the non-specific situation in which the cumulative number of times the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the probability variation continuation is less than the number obtained by subtracting 1 from the predetermined number (for example, 4 times or less) Below, it is possible to execute an expectation suggestion production that suggests that the degree of expectation of transition to a probability fluctuation state is relatively high, or to execute an expectation suggestion production that suggests the degree of expectation of transition to a probability fluctuation state. The frequency is set relatively high, or a notification effect for confirming that the state is changed to the probability variation state can be executed. For example, the cumulative number of times that the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (or the remaining number of times until reaching the limit) is held in the sub-board 300 while the probability variation continues, and the cumulative number of times (or the remaining number of times until reaching the limit) is set. Accordingly, different effects can be realized depending on whether or not it is just before the limit is reached by changing the execution mode of the expectation suggestion effect and the notification effect related to the transition to the probability variation state. For example, although it does not notify that the transition to the stochastic fluctuation state is deterministic, the degree of expectation suggestion suggesting that the probability of shifting to the stochastic fluctuation state is relatively high (for example, to the stochastic fluctuation state It is preferable to apply the above-described specifications to (expectation degree suggesting effect that suggests that the transition expectation degree is 90%).

In the above configuration, the probability variation big hit symbol (first big hit symbol) may be able to execute the expectation suggestion effect and the notification effect related to the transition to the probability variation state during the symbol fluctuation in which the symbol is changed, and the first big hit symbol Depending on whether or not it is just before reaching the limit before the stop display, the execution mode of the expectation suggestion effect and the notification effect during the symbol change in which the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed may be different. For example, when the limit is reached just before the stop display of the first big hit symbol, the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. The frequency of expectation suggestion production during the fluctuation of the design is lowered, or the expected degree of expectation is suggested. May be lowered or the notification effect for notifying that the state is changed to the probability varying state may not be executed. The first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed just before reaching the limit Expectation suggestion during symbol fluctuation The execution mode of the effect is an uncertain variation big hit symbol (the second big hit symbol) is displayed as a suggestion during the symbol fluctuation It may be the same as the performance execution mode. In other words, the execution frequency is low for both the expectation suggestion effect during symbol fluctuation in which the first big hit symbol that reaches the limit is stopped and displayed and the expectation suggestion effect during symbol fluctuation in which the second jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the suggested degree of expectation may be lowered, or the notification effect for notifying the transition to the probability variation state may not be executed. On the other hand, if it is not immediately before reaching the limit at the time before the stop display of the first big hit symbol, the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. May be increased, or a notification effect for notifying that the state is changed to the probability varying state may be made executable. In this case, compared to the execution mode of the expectation suggestion effect during the symbol change in which the second big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the expectation suggestion effect during the symbol change in which the first big hit symbol that does not reach the limit is stopped and displayed The execution frequency may be increased, the suggested degree of expectation may be increased, or a notification effect for notifying that the state is changed to the probability varying state may be executed.

In the above configuration, if it is pre-read that it will be a probability variation big hit symbol (first big hit symbol) based on the pre-determined result of the win/loss lottery value and the symbol lottery value, if the preemptive win/loss lottery value and the symbol lottery value are consumed It may be possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect and the notification effect related to the transition to the probability variation state during the symbol variation before the variation. Furthermore, depending on whether or not it is just before the limit is reached at the time of the symbol variation that consumes the pre-read win/loss lottery value and the symbol lottery value, the execution mode of the expectation suggestion production and the notification production is changed. You may. For example, when the lottery value corresponding to the first big hit symbol is just before reaching the limit at the time of being pre-determined, the frequency of expectation suggestion production during the symbol change before the symbol change at which the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed May be lowered, the expected degree of expectation may be lowered, or the notification effect for notifying the shift to the probability variation state may not be executed. The execution mode of the expectation suggestion production when the expectation suggestion production by the look-ahead of the lottery value corresponding to the first big hit symbol is executed in the state immediately before the limit is reached corresponds to the uncertain variation big hit symbol (second big hit symbol). It may be the same as the execution mode of the expectation suggestion production by prefetching the lottery value. In other words, for the expectation suggesting effect during pattern change in which the first big hit symbol that reaches the limit is prefetched and the expectation suggesting effect during symbol change in which the second big hit symbol is prefetched, the execution frequency is lowered. Alternatively, the suggested degree of expectation may be lowered, or the notification effect for notifying the shift to the probability variation state may not be executed. On the other hand, if the lottery value corresponding to the first big hit symbol is not immediately before reaching the limit when the lottery value is determined in advance, the frequency of expectation suggestion production during the symbol change before the symbol change at which the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed May be increased, the expected degree of expectation may be increased, or a notification effect for notifying that the state is changed to the probability varying state may be made executable. In this case, in comparison with the execution mode of the expectation suggestion effect during the symbol fluctuation in which the second big hit symbol is prefetched, the execution of the expectation suggestion effect during the symbol change in which the first big hit symbol that does not reach the limit is prefetched The frequency may be increased, the suggested degree of expectation may be increased, or a notification effect for notifying that the state is changed to the probability varying state may be executed.

In this embodiment, when a special symbol indicating a big hit is stopped and displayed after the execution of the predetermined special effect, the probability variation state may be surely made after the end of the special game executed after the stop display. The predetermined special effect may be an effect in which the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, and whether or not to shift to the probability variation state is informed by the symbol type of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed. You may. For example, when the decoration pattern displayed in a stopped state is a number (for example, 222 or 333), it is suggested that the probability change state may not be entered, while the decoration pattern displayed in a stopped state is a specific character (for example, SSS). In some cases, the transition to the stochastic state may be confirmed.

In the configuration in which the limit and the fall are combined, the tendency of selection of the variation pattern may be changed in the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations that can be the end of the easy entry state is a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), for example, a specific variation. The pattern may be fixedly selected. In the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), there is a tendency to select a variation pattern that does not depend on the number of lottery values held in the special figure holding means 241, while the number of symbol changes is a certain number. In the symbol fluctuation before and after (for example, 99 times and 101 times), the fluctuation pattern may be selected depending on the number of held lottery values held in the special figure holding means 241. For example, in the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), a specific notification variation pattern for informing whether or not the easy entry state continues can be selected, and the variation pattern can be selected. The fluctuation pattern may be determined using a fluctuation pattern selection criterion whose tendency does not depend on the number of holdings. On the other hand, in the symbol fluctuation before and after the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 99 times and 101 times), the fluctuation pattern is selected using a fluctuation pattern selection criterion in which a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be selected. May be determined.

(Example 3: Proposed setting suggestion)
In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect for suggesting to the player the set value of the gaming machine set by the setting changing means. Since the set value of each gaming machine can be confirmed only in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, only the gaming machine manager such as an employee of the gaming shop can confirm it, and the player can know the set value directly. I can't. On the other hand, since the setting value of the gaming machine can affect the jackpot probability, it is very important for the player whether or not the gaming setting corresponds to the gaming specifications advantageous to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed and the setting suggestion effect can be executed when the specific condition is satisfied.

The setting suggestion effect may be executable when the game ball is detected. In this case, the setting suggestion effect may be executed each time the game ball is detected, or the setting suggestion effect may be executed each time the number of times the game ball is detected reaches a predetermined number. Alternatively, the lottery value may be acquired once or each time the game ball is detected, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed on condition that the lottery value has a predetermined result. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed immediately after the detection of the game ball, or the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined timing after the detection of the game ball. In the latter case, the setting suggestion effect may be executed under the condition that the setting suggestion effect on the progress of the game or on the effect progress can be executed after the detection of the game ball.

The setting suggestion effect may be executable when the game state is changed. In this case, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at the time of starting the fluctuation of the symbol after the transition of the game state, during the fluctuation or at the time when the fluctuation stops. In addition, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the first symbol variation period after the game state transitions, or the setting suggestion effect may be performed after the symbol has been changed a predetermined number of times after the game state transitions. . In addition, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the design variation is performed by a specific variation pattern such as reach variation after the transition of the game state.

The setting suggestion effect can be executed in various modes. The setting suggestion effect may be executed using an effect image displayed on the effect display device 60, may be an accessory operation effect by the operation of the movable accessory 66, or may be an effect output from the speaker 108. It may be executed by using voice, may be executed by lighting the decoration lamp 111, or may be executed by any combination thereof. The setting suggestion effect may be executed in response to the operation of the effect button 109 or the lever 112.

The setting suggestion effect may be executed in a mode in which it is possible to specify which of a plurality of settings (for example, setting 1 to setting 6) the setting value of the gaming machine is. For example, a plurality of types (for example, six types) of setting suggestion effects corresponding to each of a plurality of settings may be prepared, and which of the set values may be suggested depending on which one is executed. It should be noted that the set value of the gaming machine and the type of setting suggestion effect to be executed do not have to completely correspond to each other, and the probability of which of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effect is executed is changed depending on the setting value. May be. For example, a first setting suggesting effect that suggests that the setting is relatively high and a second setting suggesting effect that suggests that the setting is relatively low are prepared. The execution probability of the 1st setting suggestion effect may be increased and the execution probability of the 2nd setting suggestion effect may be decreased. In addition, a setting suggestion effect that determines that the setting is a specific value or higher may be executed, and for example, a relatively advantageous setting value (for example, setting 4 to setting 6) when the third setting suggestion effect is executed. May be suggested. Further, when the setting suggestive effect of the specific type is executed, it is determined which is the set value, while when the suggestive effect of the setting different from the specific type is executed, the set value is which. It may not be decided.

The setting suggestion effect may have a different execution frequency depending on the setting value of the gaming machine. For example, in the case of a more advantageous setting, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect may be high, and in the case of a more disadvantageous setting, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect may be low. In this case, the probability that the lottery value acquired with the detection of the game ball as the trigger may be the predetermined result may be changed according to the set value. In addition, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect to be executed may be changed according to the difference in the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect due to the difference in the set value. For example, with a specific setting value (for example, setting 6), the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect may be set relatively low, while the setting suggestion effect with high reliability may be executed. As a specific example, in setting 6, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect triggered by the satisfaction of the specific condition is 5%, and in settings 4 and 5, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect triggered by the satisfaction of the specific condition is 10%. And Further, in setting 6, the execution probability of the first suggestive effect that suggests a high setting is 90% or more, while in setting 4 and 5, the execution probability of the first suggestive effect that suggests a high setting is 60% to 80%. .. In this case, the set value of the gaming machine can be suggested by the combination of the execution frequency and the type of the set suggestion effect to be executed.

The setting suggestion effect may be executed by a specific cut-in effect that is inserted during the change of the symbol. The specific cut-in effect may be a setting suggestion exclusive effect. The specific cut-in effect for setting suggestion may be an effect display that occupies almost the entire display area of the effect display device, and the decorative pattern that is variably displayed at the center of the screen during the display period of the specific cut-in effect is temporary. It may be hidden. The specific cut-in effect may have a different execution frequency depending on the set value of the gaming machine. For example, it may be suggested that the higher the frequency of execution of a particular cut-in effect, the higher the set value of the gaming machine. Here, the execution frequency of the specific cut-in effect can be defined as the ratio of the number of times of the symbol change accompanying the execution of the specific cut-in effect, out of the cumulative number of the symbol changes. The execution frequency of the specific cut-in effect may be different depending on the game state, and the execution frequency may be different between the normal probability state and the probability varying state. For example, when the gaming machine has a specific setting value, the frequency of execution of the specific cut-in effect in the probability varying state may be lower than that in the normal probability state. Conversely, the specific cut-in effect may be executed more frequently in the probability varying state than in the normal probability state. The specific cut-in effect may be executed more frequently in the first half than in the latter half of the symbol variation, and for example, the frequency at which the specific cut-in effect is executed before the reach is the specific cut-in effect is executed after the reach. The frequency may be high.

The setting suggestion effect may be executed by an effect in which a specific character appears in the middle of the pattern change, and for example, in the case where the decorative pattern is in the reach mode, the central symbol row of the three decorative symbol rows is the specific character. The setting value of the gaming machine may be suggested by the execution frequency of the character reach effect. The character reach effect may be executed less frequently than the cut-in effect described above, and may be set to about 1/10 of the execution frequency of the specific cut-in effect, for example. The character reach effect may be configured so that it is easier to determine a difference in set value according to a difference in execution frequency than the cut-in effect described above. In other words, in the character reach effect, the execution frequency is set so that the difference in the execution frequency becomes relatively large according to the difference in the set value, while in the specific cut-in effect, the execution frequency depends on the difference in the set value. The execution frequency may be set such that the difference between the two is relatively small. Further, the character reach effect may be different from the above-described cut-in effect in the difference in the execution frequency depending on the game state. For example, the execution frequency of a specific cut-in effect may be higher in the normal probability state than in the probability varying state, whereas the execution frequency of the character reach effect may be higher in the probability varying state than in the normal probability state.

The setting suggestion effect may be executed by playing a predetermined sound effect when the player enters the predetermined entrance. For example, it may be suggested that the set value of the gaming machine is high when a predetermined sound effect is played when the ball enters the starting opening. For example, in the case of setting 1-3, the predetermined sound effect triggered by the ball entering the starting opening is not reproduced, whereas in the case of the setting 4-6, the predetermined sound effect triggered by entering the starting opening. The sound effect may be played. In addition, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of reproduction of the predetermined sound effect triggered by the ball entering the starting opening. In this case, the predetermined sound effect may be reproduced in any of the settings 1-6, or the predetermined sound effect may be reproduced only in the case of the set value equal to or larger than the predetermined value (for example, the setting 4-6). Yes. Further, only when the number of holdings held in the special figure holding means 241 is a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more), a predetermined sound effect triggered by a ball entering the starting opening is played, or holding is performed. The larger the number, the higher the frequency of reproduction of the predetermined sound effect triggered by the ball entering the starting opening may be. The predetermined sound effect may be reproducible only when the ball enters the specific starting port. For example, even if the predetermined sound effect can be played back when the ball enters the first starting opening, the predetermined sound effect that is triggered when the ball enters the second starting opening is not played. Good.

When the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the disengaged manner, the setting suggesting performance may be executed by a chance eye effect in which the decorative design is an odd number or even number combination or a combination of the same color designs. For example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of even symbols and a combination of blue symbols, which is suggested to have a relatively low degree of expectation, it is the first set value or more (for example, setting 2 or more). If it is suggested that the decorative design is stopped and displayed with a combination of odd designs and a combination of red designs, which is suggested to have a relatively high degree of expectation, the setting is higher than the first set value. It may be suggested that it is equal to or higher than the second setting value (for example, setting 3 or higher). In a set value (for example, setting 2-6) that enables setting suggestion by chance eye effect, the execution frequency of chance eye effect may be changed according to the set value, or the chance eye effect effect is set regardless of the set value. The execution frequency may be the same. For example, in the case of setting 1, the chance eye effect may not be executed, and in the case of setting 2-6, the chance eye effect may be executed with the same execution frequency. In addition, in the case of a specific symbol combination (for example, 315, 634, 357) that is an out-of-coupling mode, the fact that the value is equal to or greater than a specific set value may be notified. For example, setting 4 or more, setting 5 or more may be confirmed, or setting 6 may be confirmed.

The setting suggestion effect may be executed by a special effect executed when the cumulative number of symbol changes reaches a specific number. For example, the special effect may be executed every 50 rotations or every 100 rotations, and the set value of the gaming machine may be suggested according to the content of the special effect to be executed. For example, one of a plurality of special effects having different expectations can be executed by a pattern change in which the pattern change is a specific number of times, and the set value may be suggested according to the type of the special effect to be executed. Further, the lower the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the special effect of low expectation, the higher the execution frequency of the special effect of medium expectation in setting 3-4, and the higher the set value of the special effect of high expectation. The execution frequency may be increased. In addition, if the set value is an odd number (settings 1, 3, 5), a special effect that is executed more frequently than if it is an even number (settings 2, 4, 6) may be prepared. A special effect may be prepared in which the execution frequency is higher when the value is an even number (settings 2, 4, 6) than when it is an odd number (settings 1, 3, 5). In addition, a special effect that determines that the set value is equal to or larger than a predetermined value may be executed. For example, a special effect that determines that the setting is 3 or more, or a special effect that determines that the setting is 5 or more may be prepared. The special effect whose set value is determined to be the predetermined value or more may be executed less frequently than the special effect that can be executed with all the set values.

In the special effect executed when the cumulative number of symbol changes reaches the specific number, the accuracy of the set value suggested by the special effect may increase as the number of symbol changes increases. For example, when the number of symbol changes is small (for example, 50 to 400 times), the difference in the execution frequency according to the difference in the setting value of the specific special effect is reduced, while when the number of symbol changes is large (for example, 450 times). Up to 700 times), the difference in the execution frequency depending on the difference in the set value of the specific special effect may be increased. That is, by increasing the difference in execution frequency, it may be easier to determine which set value a particular special effect may correspond to. For example, when a specific special effect is executed, it is more likely that the predetermined setting value or a predetermined setting value or more than when other special effects are executed, or the specific special effect is executed. In such a case, it is desirable to execute the special effect so that it is determined that the preset value is the preset value or the preset value or more. In addition, a special effect in which the difference in execution frequency increases as the number of symbol changes increases, and a special effect in which the difference in execution frequency does not change regardless of the number of symbol changes may be alternately executed. For example, in the number of times of symbol variation such as 50 times, 150 times, 250 times, which ends in 50, it is possible to execute a special effect in which the execution frequency is constant regardless of the number of times of symbol variation, while 100 times, 200 times, In the number of symbol fluctuations such as 300 times where the end is 00, a special effect whose execution frequency may change depending on the number of symbol fluctuations may be executable. Furthermore, when the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 800 times, 900 times), when the set value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the number of symbol variations is the execution frequency of the special effect that determines that the set value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value. It may be set higher than when the number is less than the predetermined number, or only the special effect in which the set value is determined to be the predetermined value or more may be executable.

When the design variation accompanying the super reach production with high expectation that becomes a big hit is out of the way, the setting suggestion production is executed by the specific cut-in production that can be executed immediately before the stop display of the special design at the end of the design variation Good. The specific cut-in effect may be an end effect indicating that the super-reach effect has ended due to disengagement, and is executed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the disengagement mode in the super-reach effect. Shutter effect” may be used. The shutter effect is an effect that displays the process of closing the shutter or the door of a size corresponding to the entire screen, and displays the shutter or the door by superimposing it on the front side of the display of the decorative pattern or the background image. It is an effect that the decorative pattern and the background image become invisible (to be hidden) when the door is completely closed. By such a production process, a scene change for the next pattern change is made, and for example, a decorative pattern for the next pattern change can be seen (by being displayed by opening the shutter or the door completely closed). ) Do. The shutter effect may be executed after the decorative design is stopped and displayed (fixed stop) in the detach mode in the super reach effect, and the variation of the design next to the variation in which the decorative pattern is removed in the super reach effect It may be executed at the start. As the shutter effect, a shutter effect with setting suggestion and a shutter effect without setting suggestion may be prepared. In the shutter effect with suggestion of setting value, set by adding a specific character or wording when the shutter is closed, or changing the display color of the shutter to a color that suggests high expectation such as red or gold. The degree of expectation of value may be suggested. On the other hand, in the shutter effect without setting suggestion, a specific character or word is not added when the shutter is closed, and the shutter display is a normal color such as gray. For such a shutter effect, the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency, or the specific shutter effect may be executed only when the set value is a predetermined value or more.

The above-mentioned shutter effect may be used for a revival effect in which a big hit is made after it appears to be out in the super reach effect. For example, in the super reach effect, the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in a disengaged manner, and the revival effect is executed after the effect process in which the shutter is closed. At this time, by setting the shutter effect to a specific display mode, it may be notified in advance that the revival effect will be executed after that and a big hit will occur. In addition, it may be determined that the set value is equal to or more than a predetermined value by a shutter effect in a display mode that notifies in advance that a big hit will occur. Furthermore, a plurality of types of shutter effects in a display mode for notifying beforehand that a big hit will be provided are prepared, and it is determined that the set value is a predetermined value or more (for example, setting 2 or more) in the specific shutter effect, and the revival effect is executed. May be confirmed. In another specific shutter effect, it may be determined that the set value is 6 and that the revival effect is executed.

When the mode selection screen for selecting one of a plurality of effect modes is displayed during pattern change or special game, the setting suggestion is made depending on the type of selection candidates on the mode selection screen and the display order of the selection candidates. Good. For example, the effect mode (specific effect mode) that can be displayed first on the normal mode selection screen is displayed at another position such as the second or third position on the mode suggesting mode selection screen that is not the normal mode. If so, it may be suggested that the set value is high. This mode suggesting mode selection screen can be displayed instead of the normal mode selecting screen at the timing when the normal mode selecting screen can be displayed. For example, the higher the setting value, the mode suggesting mode selecting screen can be displayed. The screen may be easily displayed. As a result, the lower the set value, the more frequently the particular effect mode is displayed as the first selection candidate, while the higher the set value, the more specific display mode is displayed as the second or third selection candidate. It may be more frequent. Further, it may be determined that the set value is equal to or larger than a predetermined value or that the set value is an even number (settings 2, 4, 6) by displaying the specific effect mode fourth. Furthermore, it may be suggested that the set value is high when a special effect mode that is normally not selectable is included in the selection candidates on the mode selection screen. The frequency of being included in the selection candidates on the mode selection screen may be increased.

The setting suggestion effect may be executed by a mode end effect indicating that the advantageous mode ends when the game state advantageous to the player is shifted to the disadvantageous game state. For example, in the normal ball entering state, the special figure 1 is a big hit and after the transition to the easy ball entering state, the special end figure 2 is not a big hit and the easy ball entering state is terminated (for example, a ball entering The setting suggestion may be made in the effect displayed at the 100th rotation, which is the end of the easy state. For example, when the set value is relatively low, the mode end effect is executed with a display color such as gray, blue, or green that indicates a low degree of expectation, while when the set value is relatively high, The mode end effect may be executable with a display color such as red or gold that indicates a high degree of expectation. In addition, it may be suggested that the set value is high when a specific character appears or a specific sound effect is played in the mode end effect. Further, when the mode end effect of the gold display color is displayed, it may be determined that the set value is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, setting 4 or more or setting 5 or more), or it is specified as the gold mode end effect. When the reproduction of the sound effect of 1 is combined, the setting 6 may be determined. The mode end effect accompanied by the setting suggestion may be executed at the time of shifting from the probability varying state to the normal probability state by the fall determination to fall to the normal probability state. In addition, when changing to the normal probability state by reaching the limit, or when changing to the normal probability state and the easy entry state when reaching the limit, the symbol fluctuation at the end of the easy entry state (that is, the easy entry state It may be executed during the fluctuation display of (final fluctuation) or when the fluctuation is stopped.

The setting suggestion effect may be executed by a mode entry effect indicating that the player enters an advantageous mode by shifting to a game state that is advantageous to the player. For example, in the normal ball entry state, the special figure 1 is a big hit and the special figure 2 is a big hit after the transition to the easy entry state, and there is a large number of symbol fluctuations at the end (for example, 100 times) The setting suggestion may be made in the mode entry effect when it is possible to shift to. The mode entry effect at this time may be executed before the start of the special game after the stop of the big hit symbol that triggers the entry into the advantageous mode, or may be executed in the end demonstration of the special game. Good. In the mode entry effect, the display color of the wording indicating the mode entry may suggest that the set value is high, or that the set value is high when a specific character appears. Further, when the wording indicating the mode entry is gold or rainbow, it may be determined that the set value is a predetermined value or more (for example, setting 5 or more or setting 6). In addition, the setting suggestion effect can be displayed only when it is the first time to shift to the advantageous mode, which is the easy entry state where the number of symbol fluctuations is large at the end, and when the advantage mode continues and the advantage mode continues. It may not be executed in the displayed mode continuation effect.

(Example 4: Winning performance)
In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a winning effect showing that a prize ball has been awarded, triggered by a ball entering a general winning opening and a large winning opening (also collectively referred to as a winning opening). In the prize winning production, the number of prize balls to be awarded when the player enters the winning opening is displayed as a number, and the total number of prize balls acquired from a specific timing to the present can be displayed. For example, when a player enters a general winning opening with three prize balls, it is possible to execute a winning effect that displays “+3” indicating that three prize balls have been won and is displayed on the screen. Add 3 to the total earned. In addition, when a player enters a large winning opening with 13 prize balls, it is possible to execute a winning effect in which 13 is added to the total winning number. At this time, instead of displaying the number (eg 1013) obtained by adding the number of wins (eg 13) to the current total number of wins (eg 1000) immediately after winning, the total number of wins is counted up by one. Makes it possible to execute winning prizes. Specifically, the total acquisition number is increased by one, such as 1001, 1002, 1003,.... As a result, the time required to count up the total number of acquisitions that starts when one game ball enters the winning opening is increased, and more prizes are given even if the number of prize balls is the same. Try to give the player the impression that a ball has been obtained. Further, in the present embodiment, a game ball heading for the special winning opening so that an additional prize ball can be obtained by entering the general winning opening (so-called bonus prize) during a special game in which the special winning opening is opened. A general prize hole (so-called bonus prize hole) is provided in the middle of the route. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be acquired in one special game is increased.

FIG. 40 shows the configuration of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment. This drawing is different from the configuration of FIG. 1 in that a general winning opening (bonus winning opening) 501 is arranged near the second operating opening 32. The bonus winning opening 501 is provided in the right passage of the game area, and is provided at a position where the player can enter the game ball when he hits the game ball to the big winning opening 20 to the right. The bonus winning opening 501 is provided at a position where the game ball passing through the second operating opening 32 cannot enter. The bonus winning opening 501 is provided with a bonus winning detection device 511 that detects the entry of a game ball into the bonus winning opening 501. The bonus winning detection device 511 is a sensor that detects a ball entering the bonus winning opening 501, and when the ball enters the bonus winning opening 501, bonus information indicating the winning is generated.

FIG. 41 shows a display example of winning effects that can be executed during the special game. As shown in the figure, on the screen during the special game, a guide display 520 for guiding right-handing, a number-of-rounds display 522 for the special game, an over-winning display 524 indicating over-winning of the special winning opening, and a bonus winning opening 501 The bonus prize display 526 and the total number of prize balls acquired display 528 can be displayed. The over-winning prize display 524 can be displayed when the player enters the special winning opening in excess of a prescribed number (for example, 10 balls) that is a closing condition of the special winning opening that is opened during the unit game. . Normally, the maximum number of balls that can be entered into the special winning opening during one unit game is up to a specified number, and a plurality of gaming balls enter the special winning opening continuously when reaching the specified number. As a result, more than the specified number of balls (so-called over-winning) may occur. Since the frequency of occurrence of such an over-winning is low, which is advantageous for the player, it is possible to display an over-winning display 524 that visually shows that the over-winning has occurred. In the over-winning prize display 524, “+13” is displayed, which indicates that the number of award balls (for example, 13) that can be acquired by entering a large winning opening is obtained. Similarly, when a ball enters the bonus prize hole 501 during the special game, a bonus prize display 526 that visually indicates that the bonus prize has occurred is made possible, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the bonus prize. “+3” is displayed to indicate that (for example, three) have been acquired. When the bonus prize and the over prize are simultaneously generated, the over prize display 524 and the bonus prize display 526 can be simultaneously displayed.

In the over-prize effect and the bonus prize effect, not only the image display on the effect display device 60 but also a sound effect in which a predetermined sound effect is output may be accompanied, or only the sound effect may be performed without displaying the image. .. That is, regarding the over-winning effect, 1) image display and audio output may be used together, 2) image display only, or 3) audio output only. Similarly, as for the bonus winning effect, 4) image display and audio output may be used together, 5) image display only, or 6) audio output only. As a voice effect at the time of over-winning or bonus winning, for example, message sounds such as “I did it”, “I’m good”, and “Congratulations” may be output. In addition, a sound effect such as "Picon" or "Shakin" may be output. When the over-winning and the bonus winning occur simultaneously, the voice output for the over-winning effect and the voice output for the bonus-winning effect can be simultaneously output from the speaker 108.

The numerical value shown in the total acquisition number display 528 at the lower right of the screen is counted up when the player enters the winning opening, and is displayed, for example, so that the numerical value increases by one. In other words, the display for changing or updating the numerical value shown in the total acquisition number display 528 is continuously executed the same number of times as the number of prize balls obtainable by winning. For example, when 13 prize balls can be obtained by entering the special winning opening, the count-up display for incrementing the numerical value shown in the total acquisition number display 528 by 13 occurs. That is, the total number-of-wins display 528 is added each time a bonus prize or a prize is won.

An example of the time required for one count-up display of the total acquisition number display 528 is about 10 milliseconds to 50 milliseconds. Therefore, the execution time of the count-up display executed by entering one ball in the special winning opening is about 130 milliseconds to 650 milliseconds if the number of prize balls in the special winning opening is 13. In addition, if the upper limit of the number of balls that can be entered into the special winning opening in one unit game (one round) is 10, it is necessary to display a count-up of 130 prize balls that can be acquired in one round. The execution time is about 1.3 seconds to 6.5 seconds. The time required for the count-up display of the number of prize balls that can be acquired in one round may be shorter than the end demonstration time of the special game. Thereby, the count-up display of the prize balls obtained during the special game can be completed by the end of the special game end demo period, that is, by the time the game shifts to the normal game and the next symbol variation starts.

When a plurality of winning detections due to a ball entering the winning opening occur consecutively, the count-up display of the total number-of-wins display 528 is sequentially executed until the count-up of the total number of award balls obtainable by a plurality of winnings is completed. To be done. Since the time value required for one count-up display is fixed, if there are a large number of total prize balls that can be acquired due to multiple consecutive winning detections, it is necessary to reflect the total number of prize balls. It may take time for the count-up display, and the count-up display may not be completed before the next winning. In this case, the count-up display currently in progress is completed without interrupting the count-up display being executed or skipping the count-up display one by one and skipping to a value reflecting the total number of prize balls. After that, the count-up display corresponding to the next prize will be executed. This ensures that the count-up display is executed the same number of times as the number of won award balls, and gives the impression that more award balls are obtained even if the number of award balls given is the same. To be given to.

FIG. 42 shows an example of the flow of changes in the total acquisition number display 528. This figure shows a game process in the case where there are 11 balls in the special winning opening 20 and 2 balls in the bonus winning opening 501 in one unit game. Since the upper limit of the number of balls to be entered into the special winning opening in one unit game is 10, the 11th entry into the special winning opening is an over-winning. In the lower part of the figure, the total number of award balls to be won is graphically displayed, which is sequentially increased by the winning detection. The thin line of the graph is the actual value when the number of prize balls is added to the winning detection timing, and the thick line of the graph is the display value displayed as the total acquisition number display 528. As shown in the figure, since one count-up display in the total acquisition number display 528 takes a certain time, there is an upper limit to the increasing speed of the display value of the total acquisition number display 528. On the other hand, the actual value of the total number of winning prize balls can be increased by a plurality of 3 or 13 at the winning detection timing, and thus can be increased faster than the display value update speed. As a result, the display value is smaller than the actual value immediately after the winning detection, and the display value increases at a constant speed until the display value catches up with the actual value. When the display value catches up with the actual value, the count-up display of the display value ends. After that, when the actual value increases again, the display value is counted up so as to catch up with the increased actual value, and the count-up display is performed until the actual value and the display value match. Even if the winning opening to the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening 12) is detected during the special game, the currently running count-up display continues without interruption, but the winning opening to the starting opening is detected. The accompanying prize balls are excluded from the addition target of the count-up display of the total acquisition number display 528.

FIG. 43 shows an example of an effect display for displaying that the total number of won prize balls has reached a predetermined number. In this figure, when the display value of the total acquisition number display 528 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2000), an emphasis display 530 of “2000 achievement!” indicating that a total of 2000 award balls have been achieved is displayed in the center of the screen. It is displayed. The highlighted display 530 is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds and 1 second), and the numerical value of the number of won prize balls (for example, 2000) indicated by the highlighted display 530 remains fixed. On the other hand, the display value of the total acquisition number display 528 at the lower right of the screen can be counted up in parallel even when the highlighted display 530 is continuously displayed. Further, when an over-winning prize or bonus prize is generated during the display of the highlighting 530, the over-winning prize display 524 or the bonus winning display 526 can be displayed in parallel while the highlighting 530 is being displayed. In addition to the highlighting 530, a voice effect may be executed to notify by voice that the total number of won prize balls has reached a predetermined number, and for example, even if a message voice such as “Congratulations on achieving 2000!” is output. Good. In addition, during the execution of the audio effect for notifying by sound that the total number of won prize balls has reached the predetermined number, the count-up display of the total number of wins display 528, the over-winning display 524, the bonus winning display 526, etc. are concurrently performed. And may be displayed. That is, the highlighted display 530 can be displayed in parallel with the image display of the over-winning effect and the image display of the bonus winning effect, and the audio effect accompanying the highlighted display 530 is the audio output for the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect. Simultaneous output may be possible in parallel with voice output. In this case, the display priority of the highlighted display 530 is preferably set to be higher than the display priority of the image display of the over-prize effect and the display priority of the image display of the bonus prize effect. That is, it is desirable that the highlighted display 530 be displayed in front of the image display for the over-winning effect and the image display for the bonus winning effect.

The display of the total number of won prize balls may be displayed during both the special game and the normal game. The total acquisition number display may be displayed only in the easy entry state, and may not be displayed in the normal entry state. For example, when a special game is executed as a big hit in Toku-zu 1 in the normal entry state and the special game is transitioned to the easy entry state after the end of the special game, the total acquisition number display 528 is displayed upon the start of the special game. The total acquisition number display 528 may be continuously displayed even during the symbol change after the end of the special game. The total acquisition number display 528 may be continuously displayed as long as the easy-to-enter state continues, even if the probability varying state has ended. That is, even when the high probability and high entry state is changed to the low probability and high entry state, the total acquisition count display 528 may be continuously displayed in the low probability and high entry state.

FIG. 44 shows a display example of the total acquisition number display 528 during the normal game. This figure shows an example of an effect display while the symbols are changing in the easy entry state. At the top of the screen is a guide display 520 for right-handing, and at the bottom right of the screen is a total acquisition count display 528. In addition, a decorative pattern 540 (also referred to as a main drawing) is variably displayed in the center of the screen, and at the bottom of the screen, the variable object 542 that indicates the degree of expectation of the variation and a hold object that indicates the degree of expectation of the lottery value to be held. 544 is displayed. Further, a simple symbol 546 (also referred to as a sub drawing) indicating that the symbol is changing is variably displayed on the right end of the screen, and the respective numbers of holdings of special maps 1 and 2 are displayed on the left end of the screen. There is a hold number display 548. The simple symbol 546 is composed of, for example, a plurality of columns (for example, three columns) of symbols, and starts the variable display when the special symbol starts changing, and the stop display when the special symbol stops changing. In the example shown in the figure, the simple symbol 546 vertically composed of three symbol arrays is shown, but the simple symbol may be composed of three symbol rows horizontally, or a plurality of symbols other than three columns. A simple symbol may be configured by the symbols in the rows (for example, two columns), or a simple symbol may be configured by a single symbol column. The number of holdings display 548 displays the number of holdings by a numeral, and in the illustrated example, the number of holdings of special figure 1 (for example, 3 in red) is displayed on the upper side and the number of holdings of special figure 2 (for example, red) is displayed on the lower side. 4) is displayed in blue.

When the variation of the symbol is stopped, the combination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 540 and the stop symbol of the simple symbol 546 are the same. For example, when the decorative symbol 540 is stopped by the symbol combination of “543”, the simple symbol 546 is also stopped by the same symbol combination of “543”. This figure shows an example of a screen in a production mode (also referred to as production mode A) in the easy-to-enter state, and in the production mode A, both the decorative pattern 540 and the simple pattern 546 are composed of only numbers. On the other hand, in the production mode (also called production mode B) in the normal ball entering state, the decorative pattern is not only numbers, but numbers (for example, “1” and “2”) and character images of the type corresponding to the numbers (for example, It is composed of a combination of the characters A and B), and for example, a design in which the image of the character A is attached to the number "1" or a design in which the image of the character B is attached to the number "2" is used as a decorative design. However, the simple symbol in the effect mode B is composed of only numbers and has the same display mode as the simple symbol 546 in the effect mode A. The effect contents or effect tendency to be displayed are different between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, and, for example, the background image and effect sound content displayed when the design changes, and the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed as a big hit are suggested. The contents of the notice production and the super reach production to be performed may differ. Note that the above-described effect mode A and effect mode B may be used in the same game state, and for example, the above-described effect mode A and effect mode B may be prepared as the effect modes in the normal entry state. However, the above-described effect mode A and effect mode B may be prepared as effect modes in the easy-to-enter state. The display position or display area on the screen of the decorative symbol when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the effect mode A is on the screen of the decorative symbol when the second special symbol is variably displayed in the effect mode A. The display position or display area is common to the display position or display area of the simple symbol when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the effect mode A, the second special symbol is in the effect mode A. It is the same as the display area on the screen of the simple symbol when it is variably displayed. Further, the display position or the display area of the decorative symbol on the screen when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the effect mode B is the decorative symbol when the second special symbol is variably displayed in the effect mode B. The display position or display area on the screen is common, and the display position or display area on the screen of the simple symbol when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the effect mode B is the second special in the effect mode B. It is the same as the display area on the screen of the simple symbol when the symbol is variably displayed. On the other hand, the display position or the display area of the decorative symbol on the screen when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the effect mode A is the decoration when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the effect mode B. Although different from the display position or display area on the screen of the symbol, the display position or display area on the screen of the simple symbol when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the effect mode A is the first in the effect mode B. It is the same as the display area on the screen of the simple symbol when the special symbol is variably displayed. Similarly, the display position or the display area of the decorative symbol on the screen when the second special symbol is variably displayed in the effect mode A is the decorative symbol when the second special symbol is variably displayed in the effect mode B. Although different from the display position or display area on the screen, the display position or display area on the screen of the simple symbol when the second special symbol is variably displayed in the effect mode A is the second special in the effect mode B. It is the same as the display area on the screen of the simple symbol when the symbol is variably displayed. Here, it is preferable that, depending on which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed, the tendency in which symbol combination the decorative symbol and the simple symbol are stopped and displayed is different. That is, the display mode at the time of changing the symbols of the decorative symbol and the simple symbol is common regardless of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed, whereas the stop of the decorative symbol and the simple symbol It is preferable that the symbol combination at the time be configured such that it is possible to determine whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed. For example, when the first special symbol is variably displayed, the symbol combination of the decorative symbol and the simple symbol is easily configured so that the symbol combination of “787” is likely to occur when the symbol is removed and the symbol combination of “666” is likely to occur when the jackpot is hit. May be done. On the other hand, when the second special symbol is variably displayed, the symbol combination of “676” is likely to be a symbol combination at the time of disengagement and the symbol combination of the decorative symbol and the simple symbol at the time of stop is likely to be a symbol combination of “777” at the time of a big hit. May be done. As another modification, the number of types of symbol combinations when the simple symbols are stopped may be smaller than the number of types of symbol combinations when the decorative symbols are stopped. For example, the symbol combination at the time of stopping the simple symbol is only "246" at the time of disengagement, and only "666" and "777" at the time of a big hit, and the symbol combination at the time of stopping the decorative symbol is dozens or more at the time of disengagement. Sometimes, there are eight types of "111", "222",... "888". Since the simple symbol 546 has a role of ensuring visibility for the player to easily identify whether the result of the hit determination is a big hit or a miss, a decorative symbol 540 that can be displayed in various aspects in a staging manner. If the number of types of symbol combinations at the time of stop is reduced as compared with, the capacity reduction and development design for the symbol combination data can be facilitated accordingly.

At least a part of specifications 1 to 6 described below may be applied to the decorative design 540 and the simple design 546 in the present embodiment.
(Specification 1) The display area of the decorative symbol 540 that is easily visible to the player is larger than the display area of the simple symbol 546 for ensuring variable display and stop display of the symbol. For example, the display size of the single symbol that constitutes at least one row of the plurality of decorative symbol rows of the decorative symbol 540 is larger than the display size of the single symbol that constitutes at least one row of the plurality of simple symbol rows of the simple symbol 546.
(Specification 2) The display position of the decorative pattern 540 is changed according to the game state, for example, depending on whether it is the easy entry state (production mode A) or the normal entry state (production mode B). As a result, various variable effects using the decorative pattern 540 are realized. On the other hand, the simple pattern 546 is the same display position in both the effect mode A and the effect mode B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the development load from increasing while securing the display state of the symbol with the simple symbol 546.
(Specification 3) The display mode of a single symbol forming at least one row of a plurality of decorative symbol rows of the decorative symbol 540 is made different depending on whether it is the effect mode A or the effect mode B. For example, in the production mode A (easy to enter the ball), a single design of the decorative design 540 is configured with only the numbers (for example, “1”, “2”... “8”), and the production mode B. In the (normal ball entering state), a single symbol of the decorative symbol 540 is formed by the symbols (for example, “1+character A”, “2+character B”... “8+character H”) that are a combination of numbers and character images. To As a result, various variable effects using the decorative pattern 540 are realized. On the other hand, the simple pattern 546 has the same display mode in both the effect mode A and the effect mode B. For example, in both the production mode A and the production mode B, a single symbol constituting the simple symbol array of the simple symbol 546 is constituted by only symbols (“1”, “2”... “8”). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the development load from increasing while securing the display state of the symbol with the simple symbol 546.
(Specification 4) The display area of the decorative pattern 540 is variable (movable) in the changing process from the start to the end of the pattern change, and the display position changes depending on, for example, normal reach or super reach. To get it. As a result, various variable effects using the decorative pattern 540 are realized. On the other hand, the display area of the simple symbol 546 is constant without changing (moving) from the start to the end of the symbol variation. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the development load from increasing while securing the display state of the symbol with the simple symbol 546.
(Specification 5) The changing speed of the decorative design 540 is variable to ultra-low speed, low speed, medium speed, high speed, ultra-high speed, etc. in the changing process from the start to the end of the design change. Further, the variation direction or scroll direction of at least one of the plurality of decorative pattern columns of the decorative pattern 540 is variable, and not only the variation from the top to the bottom but also the variation from the bottom to the top, the variation from the right to the left, and the left. It is possible to change from the right to the right and in the diagonal direction. Further, the variable display of the decorative design 540 is not limited to scroll display in a fixed direction, but is changed to a different design type depending on the display that rotates (spins) the design, changes the display size of the design, or destroys the design. The process of doing may be represented. As a result, various variable effects using the decorative pattern 540 are realized. On the other hand, the fluctuation speed of the simple symbol 546 is set to a constant speed during fluctuation display, or only the number of steps smaller than the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol 540 such as only two steps of low speed and high speed. Further, the variable display of the simple symbol 546 is limited to scroll display or rotation display in a fixed direction, for example, scrolling from top to bottom, scrolling from left to right only, or rotation display only. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the development load from increasing while securing the display state of the symbol with the simple symbol 546.
(Specification 6) The decorative symbol 540 is displayed as if it was stopped by displaying the symbol with a slight fluctuation while displaying the variation of the special symbol which is a timing different from the time when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It is possible to display a temporary stop. In the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol 540, it is possible to use a special symbol different from the numerical symbol (for example, "1", "2"... "8") used for the symbol combination at the time of the variable stop, for example, to the super reach. Special symbols with words such as "SP" and "development" that announce the development, and special symbols with words such as "super heat" that indicate that the expectation of a big hit are high Can be done. As a result, the possibility of developing into a high-expectation production process can be suggested using the decorative pattern 540, and a more diverse variation production can be realized. On the other hand, the simple symbol 546 is not temporarily stopped and displayed during the changing process from the start to the end of the symbol fluctuation, and the special symbol different from the numerical symbol is not stopped and displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the development load from increasing while securing the display state of the symbol with the simple symbol 546.

The display priority of the guidance display 520, the simple pattern 546, and the number of holdings display 548 is set to be high, and the display is prioritized over other decorative displays such as the decorative pattern 540 and the notice effect displayed in the center of the screen. That is, when the guidance display 520, the simple design 546, and the number-of-holds display 548 overlap with the decorative design 540 and the display of the notice effect displayed in the center of the screen, they overlap on the front side of the display of the decorative design 540 and the notice effect. Is displayed so that the display is not hidden by another effect display. The total acquisition number display 528 is displayed so as not to overlap with a display having a high display priority such as the guide display 520, the simple symbol 546, and the hold number display 548, and is a display area of the guide display 520, the simple symbol 546, and the hold number display 548. Are displayed in different areas.

The display count of the total acquisition count display 528 may be reset when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, the display number of the total acquisition number display 528 may be reset upon completion of the easy entry state, and the total acquisition number display 528 may be hidden in the subsequent normal entry state. When the special game is executed in the normal entry state where the total acquisition number display 528 is not displayed and the special game is executed, the total acquisition number display 528 may be started upon the start of the special game, and the initial value ( For example, the total acquisition number display 528 may start from 0). It should be noted that the display number of the total acquisition number display 528 may be reset to be hidden immediately after the end of the easy entry state, or the total acquisition number display 528 when the additional condition is satisfied after the end of the easy entry state. It is also possible to reset the display number of and hide it. For example, when the easy-to-enter state is finished, and when all of the special figure 2 holds are exhausted, that is, when the new symbol variation of special figure 1 can be started in the normal incoming state, the total number of wins is displayed. The display number of 528 may be reset so that it is not displayed. In addition, after the easy entry state ends, the number of symbol variations in the normal entry state becomes a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 20 times). When the symbol variation ends, the display number of the total acquisition number display 528 is reset. Then, it may be hidden. In this case, a special production mode (special mode) is prepared in which the number of symbol fluctuations in the normal entry state is within a predetermined number so that the player can stay in the symbol fluctuations and the number of total acquisition count display 528 is displayed when the special mode ends. May be reset to hide.

When an over-winning prize or a bonus winning occurs during the occurrence of a specific error, the effect display or audio output related to the over-winning effect or the effect display or audio output related to the bonus winning effect may not be executed. For example, if at least one of an over-winning prize and a bonus win occurs during occurrence of a "door/frame opening error" indicating that the front frame or door of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is open, an over-winning display (over-winning prize) While the effect display related to the effect) and the bonus winning display (the effect display related to the bonus winning effect) can be executed, the voice output related to the over-winning and the bonus winning may be disabled. When the "door/frame opening error" has occurred, the voice output indicating the error occurrence may be prioritized. If an over-winning or bonus winning occurs during the occurrence of the "door/frame opening error", the prize ball payout process based on the winning may be executed as usual.

Also, "magnetic sensor error" based on abnormal magnetic field detection, "radio sensor error" based on abnormal electromagnetic wave detection, "open circuit short-circuit power supply error" based on detection of disconnection or short circuit, and "excessive winning error" based on excessive prize detection. When at least one of the over-winning prize and the bonus winning prize occurs during the occurrence of “”, both the effect display and the voice output related to the over-winning prize effect and the bonus winning prize effect may be disabled. If over-winning or bonus winning occurs during at least one of "magnetic sensor error", "radio sensor error", "disconnection short-circuit power supply error" and "excessive winning error", the prize ball payout process based on the winning It may be performed as usual.

When at least one of over-winning and bonus winning occurs during occurrence of a “payout error” based on detection of abnormality in payout processing, it is possible to perform both effect display and voice output related to over-winning effect and bonus winning effect. Good. In this case, since an error has occurred in the payout process, the prize ball payout process based on the over-winning or the bonus winning is not executed.

The bonus prize effect described above may be executed only during execution of the special game, and may not be executed during execution of the normal game. When the bonus winning opening 501 is provided at a position where the player can enter the ball by hitting it right, even if the bonus winning opening 501 can be entered in the bonus winning opening 501 because the game state is easy to enter, the bonus winning is triggered. The bonus prize presentation may not be executed. Further, the bonus prize may not be executed during a part of the period during which the special game is being executed. The execution process of the special game is a) a start demo period, b) a first unit game execution period (first round big winning opening period), c) an interval period until the next unit game starts, d) Execution period of the second unit game (the special winning opening period of the second round), e) Interval period until the next unit game starts,..., f) Execution period of the last unit game (final round) Of the special winning opening), g) an interval period until the start of the end demo, and h) an end demo period. At this time, the bonus prize may be executed only during the execution of the unit game and the interval between the unit games in the execution period of the special game, and may not be executed during the start demo period and the end demo period of the special game. In other words, from the timing when the special winning opening is first opened in the special game to the timing when the final winning opening is closed in the special game, or from the timing when the special winning opening is first opened in the special game It is also possible to execute the bonus winning effect until a predetermined time has passed since the closing of the special winning opening and the start timing of the end demo is reached. Similarly, for over-winning prize production, from the timing when the special winning opening is first opened in the special game to the timing when the final winning opening is closed in the special game, or the first winning opening is opened in the special game. It may be possible to execute the over-winning effect until a predetermined time elapses and the start timing of the end demo is reached after the special winning opening is closed in the special game. As a result, even if an over-winning prize or bonus prize is generated during the start demo period and the end demo period of the special game, the over-win prize effect and bonus prize effect may not be executed during the start demo period and the end demo period. ..

In the above-described bonus winning effect, when the balls to the bonus winning opening 501 are continuously generated a plurality of times, the bonus winning effects of the same number as the number of balls to the bonus winning opening may be continuously executed. For example, when two gaming balls enter the bonus winning opening 501 in succession, the bonus winning effect may be executed twice in succession. In this case, the bonus prize display 526 may be hidden after the first bonus prize display 526 is continued for a predetermined time, and then the bonus prize display 526 may be hidden after the second bonus prize display 526 is continued for a predetermined time. .. The voice effect related to the bonus prize may be executed at the start of the display of the bonus prize display 526, so that the effect voice is output twice in accordance with the bonus prize display 526 twice. The second voice effect may be started after the end. As a modified example, when the second bonus winning display 501 is continued while the second bonus winning display 526 is continued, the first bonus winning display 526 is interrupted and the second bonus winning display 526 is interrupted. The bonus prize display 526 may be hidden after the second bonus game prize display 526 is continued for a predetermined time. Similarly, if there is a second ball entering the bonus winning opening 501 during the execution of the voice effect for the first bonus, the voice effect for the first bonus is interrupted and the second bonus. The voice output related to winning may be started.

In the above-described over-winning presentation effect, when the over-winning prize to the special winning opening occurs a plurality of times in succession, the over-winning presentation effect may be executed only once regardless of the occurrence of the plurality of over-winning prizes. That is, regardless of the number of over-winning prizes during one unit game, the over-winning effect may be executed only once per unit game. For example, when the number of balls entered into the special winning opening during the unit game reaches a prescribed number (for example, 10), the game opening is closed, and two additional game balls are added to the special winning opening. When the player enters, the over-win prize effect (both effect display and voice output) may be executed only once after closing the special winning opening. In this case, the number of additional prize balls reflected in the total number-of-wins display 528 is not the number of prize balls for one time, but the number of prize balls corresponding to two over-wins. As a modified example, if two over-winnings occur during one unit game, two over-winning presentations may be executed, for example, the first over-winning presentation after the start of the first over-winning presentation. You may interrupt (both effect display and sound output) and start the second over-winning effect (both effect display and sound output).

A prize ball signal may be output from the external information output terminal 160 in response to a bonus prize or an over prize. The award ball signal output from the external information output terminal 160 may be output every time the total number of award balls to be acquired increases by a predetermined number (for example, 10). For example, a bonus prize (for example, 3 award balls) may be output. When the number of prize balls is increased by 10 or more in total, the prize ball signal can be output upon the bonus winning. The prize ball signal may be output upon the detection of the winning of the special winning opening, or the prize ball signal may be necessarily output for each winning (eg, 13 prize balls) at the special winning opening. It should be noted that the prize ball signal may be output twice when one game ball is entered at the special winning opening. That is, when there is a bonus prize, the prize ball signal triggered by the bonus prize is output only once, but when there is an over prize, the prize ball signal triggered by the over prize is one or two. It may be possible to output any one of the times.

When a bonus prize or a winning in the special winning opening occurs during the power failure recovery processing, the total acquisition number display update processing may be executed after the power failure recovery processing is completed. When the power failure occurs, it takes about 0.5 seconds to 1 second to perform the power failure recovery process from the power failure recovery to the normalization of the effect display on the effect display device 60. When a bonus prize or an over-prize is generated during the power interruption recovery process, the effect display on the effect display device 60 cannot be executed, and therefore the effect display and the audio output related to the bonus prize effect or the over-prize effect are disabled. .. On the other hand, the effect display that counts up the total acquisition number display 528 triggered by the winning that is generated during the power failure recovery processing can be executed even after the power failure recovery. For example, when the display number of the total acquisition number display 528 immediately before the occurrence of the power failure is N, the display number of the total acquisition number display 528 immediately after the completion of the power failure recovery process is set to N, and the display number N is counted up. The display may be executed. In this case, it can be said that the count-up display corresponding to the winning generated during the power interruption recovery process is executed from the beginning.

If the count-up display of the total acquisition number display 528 is being executed immediately before the occurrence of the power failure, the count-up display may be executed from the middle after the power failure recovery process. For example, while the total acquisition number display 528 immediately before the power failure occurs is N, the actual value of the total acquisition number is N+α, and the power failure occurs while the count-up display is being performed toward the actual value N+α. When it occurs, the display number of the total acquisition number display 528 immediately after the completion of the power interruption recovery process may be set to N+α, and the count-up display may be executed from the display number N+α. In this case, since the display number jumps from the display number N immediately before the power failure to the display number N+α immediately after the power recovery processing, the count-up display corresponding to the winning that occurred during the power recovery processing is executed from the middle. Can be said.

If a bonus prize or a winning in the special winning opening occurs during the power failure recovery process, the count-up display of the total acquisition number display may be skipped after the completion of the power failure recovery process. For example, when the number of displays of the total acquisition number display 528 immediately before the occurrence of power failure is N and β prizes are generated in the middle of the power recovery process, the total acquisition number display 528 immediately after completion of the power recovery process. The display number of N may be N+β, and the subsequent count-up display may be omitted. In this case, it can be said that the count-up display corresponding to the winning generated during the power failure recovery process is not executed.

As described above, when the power failure occurs, if the count-up display of the total acquisition number display 528 immediately before the power failure occurs is not completed, the unfinished count-up display after the power failure recovery process is at least partially. It will be skipped and not executed. In particular, if the power is cut off during a special game with a large number of prize balls, the count-up effect triggered by winning the prize at the special winning opening can be at least partially skipped. On the other hand, when the prize ball payout process triggered by the winning of the special winning opening is not completed immediately before the power failure occurs, the unfinished payout process is performed after the power failure recovery process is completed. The uncompleted payout process after the power failure recovery process is only performed when the ram is not cleared at the time of power failure. When the ram clear process is performed at the time of power interruption, the information regarding the number of won prize balls is reset, so that the incomplete payout process is not performed and the incomplete count-up display of the total earned number display 528 is not performed.

The above-described count-up display of the total acquisition number display 528 is executed in response to the occurrence of a prize in a special winning opening or a bonus prize. For example, when the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 105 are full and the payout process is interrupted, that is, even when a payout error occurs, the total number of acquisitions regardless of whether or not the payout process is interrupted. The count-up display of the display 528 is continuously executed. Therefore, even if the payout process is not completed, if the count-up display of the total acquisition number display 528 triggered by the winning is completed, the payout process is restarted even if the subsequent payout process is restarted. The count-up display triggered is not made. For example, when the second special game is executed as a big hit immediately after the end of the first special game, the second time while the payout process of the prize balls obtained in the first special game is not completed. When the special game is started and the payout process of the prize balls obtained in the first special game is executed during the second special game, the payout process of the prize balls obtained in the first special game is triggered. The count up display is not executed during the second special game. During the second special game, a count-up display of the total acquisition number display 528 triggered by the bonus prize or the special winning opening prize during the second special game is executed.

The present invention has been described above based on the embodiments. This embodiment is merely an example, and it will be understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications can be made to the combination of each constituent element and each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. is there. Hereinafter, modified examples will be described.

The configurations described in each of the above-described first to fourth embodiments can be combined with the combinations described in the above-described base technology. Further, the configurations described in the first to fourth embodiments can be combined. For example, as a configuration in which all of the first to fourth embodiments are combined, in a fall and limit configuration, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect described in the third embodiment, and it is possible to execute the winning effect described in the fourth embodiment. Good.

Hereinafter, some aspects of the present invention will be described.

(Aspect 1)
A game board with a game area formed,
A starting opening provided in the game area,
A win/loss determination means for performing a win/loss determination to determine whether or not it is possible to shift to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game based on a lottery value acquired upon entry to the starting opening.
A symbol is variably displayed, and a symbol display device showing the result of the winning/absence determination by the stop display of the symbol,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device, special game control means for shifting to the special game after the stop display,
Probability state control means for transitioning from a normal probability state in which the probability of the hit determination is a big hit to a predetermined probability to a probability varying state in which the probability of the hit result is a big hit is higher than the predetermined probability. ,
And a production display device capable of displaying a production,
There are at least a first big hit symbol and a second big hit symbol as the type of symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit, and the probability variation after the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the first big hit symbol. It is possible to shift to the state, and it is possible to shift to the normal probability state after the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the second big hit symbol,
When the cumulative number of times the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed reaches a predetermined number during the probability change from the transition to the probability variation state from the normal probability state to the transition to the normal probability state next, While the cumulative number of probability variation continues to reach the predetermined number, the first big hit symbol is shifted to the normal probability state after the special game executed after the stop display of the first jackpot symbol, while the first jackpot symbol is continued during the probability variation continuation. If the cumulative number of times stopped and displayed is less than the predetermined number, the cumulative number of times during which the probability variation continues is less than the predetermined number. The probability after the special game executed after the stop display of the first big hit symbol is finished. Moved to a floating state,
It is possible to execute an expectation suggesting effect that suggests the degree of expectation of transition to the probability variation state after the end of the special game while the probability variation continues.
The expectation suggestion effect that is executed under a specific situation in which the cumulative number of times the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the probability variation continuation is the predetermined number minus one is the first during the probability variation continuation. The cumulative number of times the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed is less than the expectation suggestive effect that is executed in a non-specific situation where the cumulative number of times is less than the predetermined number minus 1, or the above-mentioned probability variation continues A ball game machine in which a degree of expectation suggestion production is less likely to be executed under the specific situation than under the non-specific situation during which the probability change continues.

(Aspect 2)
A game board with a game area formed,
A launching device that launches a game ball toward the game area according to a launching operation of a player,
A first starting opening provided in the game area,
A second starting opening provided in the game area, having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change a ball entry into a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state,
Based on the winning/losing lottery value acquired upon entry of the ball into the first starting opening or the second starting opening, it is determined whether or not it is possible to shift to the special game which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. Means for determining whether or not to
A symbol is variably displayed, and a symbol display device showing the result of the winning/absence determination by the stop display of the symbol,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device, special game control means for shifting to the special game after the stop display,
Probability state control means for transitioning from a normal probability state in which the probability of the hit determination is a big hit to a predetermined probability to a probability varying state in which the probability of the hit result is a big hit is higher than the predetermined probability. ,
Ball entry state control means for shifting from a normal ball entry state in which the ease of entry to the second starting opening is relatively low to an entry easy state in which the ease of entering the second starting opening is relatively high. ,
A fall determination that executes a fall determination that determines whether or not the probability variation state can fall into the normal probability state based on a fall lottery value acquired when a ball enters the first start opening or the second start opening. Means and
And a production display device capable of displaying production,
In the case where a fall determination is made to fall to the normal probability state before the special variation is transitioned to the probability variation state and the easy entry state, and the number of symbol variations after the completion of the special game reaches a predetermined number. , If the number of symbol variations after the special game is transitioned to the normal probability state and the easy entry state after the fall determination, and then the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game becomes the predetermined number, the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game is Transitioned to the normal entry state at the end of the symbol variation that is the predetermined number,
After the special game is finished, the probability is changed to the probability variation state and the easy entry state, and after the number of symbol variations after the special game reaches the predetermined number, a fall determination is made to fall to the normal probability state. In this case, the transition to the normal probability state and the normal entry state is triggered by the start of the symbol variation related to the fall determination,
It is possible to display a guide display on the effect display device, which prompts the player to launch a game ball in a predetermined direction, which allows or facilitates entry into the second starting opening.
When transitioning to the probability variation state and the easy entry state after the end of the special game, a fall determination to fall to the normal probability state until the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game reaches the predetermined number Regardless of whether it is made, the guide display is displayed at least until the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game becomes the predetermined number,
After the special game is finished, the probability variation state and the easy entry state are entered, and after the number of symbol variations after the special game comes to the predetermined number, a fall determination is made to fall to the normal probability state. In this case, the guide display is displayed before the start of the symbol variation related to the fall determination, and the guide display is hidden when the symbol variation related to the fall determination is started,
After the end of the special game, the probability change state and the easy entry state are transferred, and the number of symbol changes after the end of the special game becomes the predetermined number without a fall determination for falling to the normal probability state. After that, if the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the guide display is displayed until before the start of the symbol variation related to the hit determination, and the guidance display is hidden when the symbol variation related to the hit determination is started. ,
After the special game is finished, the probability is changed to the probability variation state and the easy entry state, and the fall determination is made to fall to the normal probability state until the number of symbol variations after the special game becomes the predetermined number, And, the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game is within the predetermined number If the result of the winning/disapproval determination does not result in a big hit, the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game becomes the predetermined number. A ball game machine in which a notification effect is displayed on the effect display device for informing that the user has fallen to the normal probability state during variable display of symbol fluctuation.

(Aspect 3)
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided in the game area,
A second starting opening provided in the game area, having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change a ball entry into a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state,
Based on the winning/losing lottery value acquired upon entry of the ball into the first starting opening or the second starting opening, it is determined whether or not it is possible to shift to the special game which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. Means for determining whether or not to
A symbol is variably displayed, and a symbol display device showing the result of the winning/absence determination by the stop display of the symbol,
A variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern that determines a variation time from the start of variation of the symbol to the stop display,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device, special game control means for shifting to the special game after the stop display,
Probability state control means for transitioning from a normal probability state in which the probability of the hit determination is a big hit to a predetermined probability to a probability varying state in which the probability of the hit result is a big hit is higher than the predetermined probability. ,
Ball entry state control means for shifting from a normal ball entry state in which the ease of entry to the second starting opening is relatively low to an entry easy state in which the ease of entering the second starting opening is relatively high. ,
A fall determination that executes a fall determination that determines whether or not the probability variation state can fall into the normal probability state based on a fall lottery value acquired when a ball enters the first start opening or the second start opening. Means and
And a production display device capable of displaying production,
In the case where a fall determination is made to fall to the normal probability state before the special variation is transitioned to the probability variation state and the easy entry state, and the number of symbol variations after the completion of the special game reaches a predetermined number. , If the number of symbol variations after the special game is transitioned to the normal probability state and the easy entry state after the fall determination, and then the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game becomes the predetermined number, the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game is Transitioned to the normal entry state at the end of the symbol variation that is the predetermined number,
After the special game is finished, the probability is changed to the probability variation state and the easy entry state, and after the number of symbol variations after the special game reaches the predetermined number, a fall determination is made to fall to the normal probability state. In this case, the transition to the normal probability state and the normal entry state is triggered by the start of the symbol variation related to the fall determination,
When transitioning to the probability variation state and the easy-to-enter state after the end of the special game, the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game is within the predetermined number, and the variation pattern selection tendency is at least in the symbol variation. It is changed once, the selection tendency of the variation pattern is not changed by the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game exceeds the predetermined number in the probability variation state and the easy entry state, or the probability The number of symbol changes after the end of the special game is the number of changes in the selection tendency of the variation pattern in the symbol change in which the number of symbol changes after the end of the special game exceeds the predetermined number in the variable state and the easy-to-enter state. A ball game machine less than the number of times of changing the selection tendency of the variation pattern in the symbol variation that is within a predetermined number.

(Aspect 4)
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided in the game area,
A second starting opening provided in the game area, having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change a ball entry into a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state,
Based on the winning/winning lottery value acquired upon entry of the ball into the first starting opening or the second starting opening, it is determined whether to shift to the special game which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. A means for judging whether or not to execute,
A special symbol is variably displayed, and a special symbol display device that shows the result of the hit determination by the stop display of the special symbol,
When the special symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, special game control means for shifting to the special game after the stop display,
Probability state control means for transitioning from a normal probability state in which the probability of the hit determination is a big hit to a predetermined probability to a probability varying state in which the probability of the hit result is a big hit is higher than the predetermined probability. ,
Ball entry state control means for shifting from a normal ball entry state in which the ease of entry to the second starting opening is relatively low to an entry easy state in which the ease of entering the second starting opening is relatively high. ,
An operating port provided in the game area,
A normal symbol is displayed in a variably manner upon entry into the working opening, and a normal symbol display device in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed,
When the normal symbol indicating that it is a hit on the normal symbol display device is stopped and displayed, operation control means for operating the entrance variation mechanism after the stop display,
A fall determination that executes a fall determination that determines whether or not the probability variation state can fall into the normal probability state based on a fall lottery value acquired when a ball enters the first start opening or the second start opening. Means and
And a production display device capable of displaying production,
After the special game is finished, the probability is changed to the probability variation state and the easy-to-enter state. After the special game, the number of symbol changes of the special symbol falls to the normal probability state before reaching a predetermined number. If it is made, it is shifted to the normal probability state and the easy entry state after the fall determination, and if the number of symbol fluctuations of the special symbol after the special game becomes the predetermined number, then the special game After the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol that the number of symbol variations of the special symbol after the end of the predetermined number is transitioned to the normal entry state,
After the special game is finished, the probability is changed to the probability variation state and the easy-to-enter state, and after the special game is finished, the number of symbol variations of the special symbol becomes the predetermined number and then falls to the normal probability state. If the determination is made, transition to the normal probability state and the normal entry state with the start of the symbol variation of the special symbol related to the fall determination,
After the end of the special game is transitioned to the probability variation state and the easy-to-enter state, the result of the hit determination is a big hit before the number of symbol changes of the special symbol after the end of the special game reaches the predetermined number. If it is or when the fall determination to fall to the normal probability state is made, the normal symbol is started to fluctuate before the fluctuation start of the special symbol related to the jackpot or before the fluctuation of the special symbol related to the fall judgment. , If the normal symbol indicating that it is a hit is displayed while changing the special symbol relating to the big hit or the variation of the special symbol relating to the fall determination, if the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, then the variation of the incoming ball The mechanism operates for a first operating time,
After the end of the special game is transitioned to the probability variation state and the easy entry state, the number of variations of the special symbol after the end of the special game with the probability variation state and the easy entry state is the predetermined number If the result of the hit determination is a big hit after it has become or a fall judgment to fall to the normal probability state is made, before the start of fluctuation of the special symbol related to the big hit or the special symbol related to the fall judgment If the normal symbol is started to fluctuate before the start of fluctuation, and the normal symbol indicating that it is a hit during the variable display of the special symbol related to the big hit or the variable display of the special symbol related to the fall judgment is displayed stopped, A ball game machine in which the entry variation mechanism operates over a second operation time shorter than the first operation time after the normal symbol is stopped and displayed.

(Aspect 5)
A game board with a game area formed,
A launching device that launches a game ball toward the game area according to a launching operation of a player,
A first starting opening provided in the game area,
A second starting opening provided in the game area, having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change a ball entry into a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state,
Based on a lottery value acquired upon entry of the ball into the first starting opening or the second starting opening, it is determined whether or not it is possible to shift to a special game which is a more advantageous state for the player than a normal game. Means for determining whether or not to
A symbol is variably displayed, and a symbol display device showing the result of the winning/absence determination by the stop display of the symbol,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device, special game control means for shifting to the special game after the stop display,
Probability state control means for transitioning from a normal probability state in which the probability of the hit determination is a big hit to a predetermined probability to a probability varying state in which the probability of the hit result is a big hit is higher than the predetermined probability. ,
Ball entry state control means for shifting from a normal ball entry state in which the ease of entry to the second starting opening is relatively low to an entry easy state in which the ease of entering the second starting opening is relatively high. ,
And a production display device capable of displaying a production,
There are at least a first big hit symbol and a second big hit symbol as the types of symbols indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big jackpot, and the stop display of the first big hit symbol in the normal probability state and the normal entrance state. After the end of the special game executed later, it is possible to shift to the easy entry state, while after the special game executed after the stop display of the second big hit symbol in the normal probability state and the normal entry state Without transitioning to the easy entry state,
If the result of the hit determination in the normal probability state and the normal ball entering state is a big hit, according to the contents of the effect displayed on the effect display device during the symbol variation related to the big hit, according to the big hit The possibility of which one of the first big hit symbol and the second big hit symbol is stopped and displayed is different when the symbol fluctuation is stopped,
When the cumulative number of times that the symbol indicating that it is a big hit during the probability change continues from the transition from the normal probability state to the probability variation state until the next transition to the normal probability state is stopped and reaches a predetermined number , The cumulative number of times the symbol indicating that the big hit is stopped and displayed during the probability variation continues is less than a predetermined number while the normal probability state is transitioned after the special game executed after the stop display is completed. In this case, it is possible to shift to the stochastic fluctuation state after the end of the special game executed after the stop display,
When a symbol indicating a big hit is stopped and displayed after execution of a predetermined special effect, a ball game machine that is shifted to the probability varying state after the end of the special game executed after the stop display.

11 1st starting opening, 12 2nd starting opening, 60 production display device, 80 game board, 81 game area, 210 lottery means, 213 general figure lottery means, 220 adequacy determination means, 230 fluctuation pattern determination means, 260 special game control Means, 275 opening and closing control means, 303 effect determination means, 304 effect control means.

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area formed,
A starting opening provided in the game area,
A win/loss determination means for performing a win/loss determination to determine whether or not it is possible to shift to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game based on a lottery value acquired upon entry to the starting opening.
A symbol is variably displayed, and a symbol display device showing the result of the winning/absence determination by the stop display of the symbol,
When a symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device, special game control means for shifting to the special game after the stop display,
Probability state control means for transitioning from a normal probability state in which the probability of the hit determination is a big hit to a predetermined probability to a probability varying state in which the probability of the hit result is a big hit is higher than the predetermined probability. ,
And a production display device capable of displaying a production,
There are at least a first big hit symbol and a second big hit symbol as the type of symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit, and the probability variation after the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the first big hit symbol. It is possible to shift to the state, and it is possible to shift to the normal probability state after the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the second big hit symbol,
When the cumulative number of times the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed reaches a predetermined number during the probability change from the transition to the probability variation state from the normal probability state to the transition to the normal probability state next, While the cumulative number of probability variation continues to reach the predetermined number, the first big hit symbol is shifted to the normal probability state after the special game executed after the stop display of the first jackpot symbol, while the first jackpot symbol is continued during the probability variation continuation. If the cumulative number of times stopped and displayed is less than the predetermined number, the cumulative number of times during which the probability variation continues is less than the predetermined number. The probability after the special game executed after the stop display of the first big hit symbol is finished. Moved to a floating state,
It is possible to execute an expectation suggesting effect that suggests the degree of expectation of transition to the probability variation state after the end of the special game while the probability variation continues.
The expectation suggestion effect that is executed under a specific situation in which the cumulative number of times the first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the probability variation continuation is the predetermined number minus one is the first during the probability variation continuation. The cumulative number of times the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed is less than the expectation suggestive effect that is executed in a non-specific situation where the cumulative number of times is less than the predetermined number minus 1, or the above-mentioned probability variation continues A ball game machine in which a degree of expectation suggestion production is less likely to be executed under the specific situation than under the non-specific situation during which the probability change continues.

Images